300 line projectyourpipelinelibrary.org/nnl reforestation plan 7-12-10 for dbl side... ·...
Post on 24-Sep-2020
1 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
[Type text]
Environment
REFORESTATION PLAN
Filed under the New Jersey No Net Loss Reforestation Act (N.J.S.A. 13:1L-14.1 et seq.) and Program Guidelines (revised September 2007)
300 LINE PROJECT
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
Prepared for:
1001 Louisiana Street
Houston, Texas 77002
July 2010
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
i
July 2010
Contents
1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Project Description ...............................................................................................................1-1
1.1.1 Pipeline Facilities ...................................................................................................1-1
1.1.2 Forest Land Assessment ......................................................................................1-2
2.0 General Reforestation Plan .......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Tree Planting Specification ..................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1 Scope of Work .......................................................................................................2-1
2.1.2 Scheduling of work ................................................................................................2-1
2.1.3 Personnel ...............................................................................................................2-1
2.1.4 Protection of Utilities ..............................................................................................2-1
2.1.5 Mulch .....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.6 Layout ....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.7 Water .....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.8 Nursery Stock ........................................................................................................2-2
2.1.9 Quality ....................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.10 Shipment, Delivery, Inspection and acceptance ..................................................2-3
2.1.11 Time of Planting.....................................................................................................2-3
2.1.12 Planting ..................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.13 Guying, Staking and wrapping ..............................................................................2-4
2.1.14 Planting preparations ............................................................................................2-4
2.1.15 Mulching ................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.16 Pruning...................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.17 Clean up ................................................................................................................2-5
2.1.18 Inspections for acceptance ...................................................................................2-5
2.2 Upland Forest Restoration ...................................................................................................2-5
2.3 ROW Restoration and Monitoring Plan ...............................................................................2-9
2.3.1 Site Preparation, Clearing and Construction ........................................................2-9
2.3.2 Post-construction restoration and revegetation ................................................. 2-10
2.4 Post-Construction Monitoring (Standard Construction) ................................................... 2-13
2.5 Specialized Methods ......................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.1 Palustrine Forested Wetlands ............................................................................ 2-14
2.5.2 Upland Forest Seed Mixes ................................................................................. 2-18
2.5.3 Areas with Moderate to Poor Suitability for Planting ......................................... 2-18
2.5.4 Eastern Hemlock / Oak Community .................................................................. 2-18
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
ii
July 2010
3.0 State Owned Properties ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area ..................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Existing Forested Area ..........................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Suitability for Planting ............................................................................................3-2
3.1.3 Soils and Topography ...........................................................................................3-5
3.1.4 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area Plant List ...................................3-7
3.2 Waywayanda State Park ......................................................................................................3-8
3.2.1 Existing Forested Area ..........................................................................................3-8
3.2.2 Suitability for Planting ......................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.3 Soils and Topography ........................................................................................ 3-13
3.2.4 Waywayanda State Park Plant List ................................................................... 3-15
3.3 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area ........................................................................................ 3-19
3.3.1 Existing Forested Area ....................................................................................... 3-19
3.3.2 Suitability for Planting ......................................................................................... 3-21
3.3.3 Soils and Topography ........................................................................................ 3-23
3.3.4 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area Plan List .......................................................... 3-24
3.4 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park .................................................................. 3-27
3.4.1 Existing Forested Area ....................................................................................... 3-27
3.4.2 Suitability for Planting ......................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.3 Soils and Topography ........................................................................................ 3-31
3.4.4 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park Plan List .................................... 3-32
4.0 Tree Maintenance Schedule ....................................................................................... 4-36
4.1 Scope of Work ................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.2 Inspections ......................................................................................................................... 4-36
4.3 Watering ............................................................................................................................ 4-36
4.4 Mulching ............................................................................................................................ 4-36
4.5 Weeding ............................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.6 Securing Stakes and Guys ............................................................................................... 4-37
4.7 Resetting Trees to Plumb ................................................................................................. 4-37
4.8 Insect and Disease Control ............................................................................................... 4-37
4.9 Protection Against Deer Browse ....................................................................................... 4-37
4.10 Fertilization ........................................................................................................................ 4-37
4.11 Pruning............................................................................................................................... 4-38
5.0 Summary...................................................................................................................... 5-39
6.0 References ..................................................................................................................... 6-1
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
iii
July 2010
List of Appendices
Appendix A General Information Form
Appendix B Off-Site Restoration Form
Appendix C Monetary Compensation Form
Appendix D Photographs
Appendix E Figures
Appendix F Vegetation Community Mapping
Appendix G Tree Planting Diagram
Appendix H 300 Line Project Environmental Construction Plan
Appendix I Invasive Species Management Plan
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
iv
July 2010
List of Tables
Table 1.1-1 Proposed Pipeline Facilities Associated With The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 ........ 1-2
Table 2.2-1 Plant Species Composition Of Seed Mixes For Upland Mitigation Activities For The
300 Line Project – Loop 325.......................................................................................... 2-8
Table 2.5-1 Plant Species Composition Of Seed Mixes For Wetland Reforestation For The 300 Line
Project – Loop 325 ....................................................................................................... 2-15
Table 2.5-2 Plant Species Composition Of Seed Mixes For Riparian Zone Reforestation For The
300 Line Project – Loop 325........................................................................................ 2-17
Table 3.1-1 Forest Community Types Impacted By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg
Mountain Wildlife Management Area ........................................................................... 3-1
Table 3.1-2 Impacts To Deforested Areas 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife
Management Area .......................................................................................................... 3-2
Table 3.1-3 Suitability For Planting 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife
Management Area .......................................................................................................... 3-3
Table 3.1-4 Shallow Depth To Bedrock Areas For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg
Mountain Wildlife Management Area ........................................................................... 3-4
Table 3.1-5 Soils Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife
Management Area .......................................................................................................... 3-5
Table 3.1-6 Steep Slopes (>28 Degrees) Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Hamburg
Mountain Wildlife Management Area ........................................................................... 3-6
Table 3.1-7 Project Red Oak/Sweet Birch Community Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop
325 .................................................................................................................................. 3-7
Table 3.2-1 Forest Community Types Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Waywayanda
State Park ........................................................................................................................ 3-9
Table 3.2-2 Impacts To Deforested Areas 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Waywayanda State Park ......
....................................................................................................................................... 3-10
Table 3.2-3 Suitability For Planting 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Waywayanda State Park ....... 3-11
Table 3.2-4 Shallow Depth To Bedrock Areas For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Waywayanda
State Park ...................................................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3.2-5 Soils Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Waywayanda State Park .......... 3-13
Table 3.2-6 Project Oak/Hickory Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 .......
....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Table 3.2-7 Project Chestnut Oak/Scrub Oak Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project –
Loop 325 ....................................................................................................................... 3-16
Table 3.2-8 Project Eastern Hemlock/Oak Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop
325 ................................................................................................................................ 3-17
Table 3.2-9 Project Red Maple/Hemlock/Yellow Birch Community* Plant List For The 300 Line
Project – Loop 325 ....................................................................................................... 3-18
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
v
July 2010
Table 3.3-1 Forest Community Types Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Bearfort
Mountain Natural Area ................................................................................................ 3-19
Table 3.3-2 Impacts To Deforested Areas 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Bearfort Mountain Natural
Area ............................................................................................................................... 3-20
Table 3.3-3 Suitability For Planting 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area ...
....................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Table 3.3-4 Shallow Depth To Bedrock Areas For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Bearfort
Mountain Natural Area ................................................................................................ 3-22
Table 3.3-5 Soils Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area .....
....................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Table 3.3-6 Project Chestnut Oak/Scrub Oak Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project –
Loop 325 ....................................................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3.3-7 Project Eastern Hemlock/Oak Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop
325 ................................................................................................................................ 3-25
Table 3.3-8 Project Red Maple/Hemlock/Yellow Birch Community* Plant List 300 Line Project –
Loop 325 ....................................................................................................................... 3-26
Table 3.4-1 Forest Community Types Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Long Pond
Ironworks / Ringwood State Park ................................................................................ 3-27
Table 3.4-2 Impacts To Deforested Areas 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Long Pond Ironworks /
Ringwood State Park .................................................................................................... 3-28
Table 3.4-3 Suitability For Planting 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood
State Park ...................................................................................................................... 3-29
Table 3.4-4 Shallow Depth To Bedrock Areas For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Long Pond
Ironworks / Ringwood State Park ................................................................................ 3-30
Table 3.4-5 Soils Crossed By The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood
State Park ...................................................................................................................... 3-31
Table 3.4-6 Project Red Oak/Sweet Birch Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop
325 ................................................................................................................................ 3-32
Table 3.4-7 Project Oak/Hickory Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop 325 .......
....................................................................................................................................... 3-33
Table 3.4-8 Project Eastern Hemlock/Oak Community* Plant List For The 300 Line Project – Loop
325 ................................................................................................................................ 3-34
Table 3.4-9 Project Red Maple/Hemlock/Yellow Birch Community* Plant List For The 300 Line
Project – Loop 325 ....................................................................................................... 3-35
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
1-1
July 2010
1.0 Introduction
Tennessee Gas Pipeline Company (“Tennessee”) is proposing the 300 Line Project (“Project”) in
northern Pennsylvania and northwestern New Jersey. The Project will include construction of
approximately 127 miles of 30-inch diameter pipeline consisting of seven separate pipeline loops in
northern Pennsylvania, totaling approximately 111 miles, and one pipeline loop (Loop 325) in
northwestern New Jersey totaling approximately 15.98 miles. To the extent that it is practicable and
feasible, Tennessee proposes to locate the pipeline loops within and adjacent to the right-of-way
(“ROW”) associated with their existing 24-inch diameter pipeline designated as the 300 Line.
Additionally, Tennessee proposes to construct two new compressor stations near its existing 300 Line
ROW in northwestern Pennsylvania, as well as improvements and modifications at seven of its existing
compressor station facilities in Pennsylvania and New Jersey. Tennessee proposes to begin
construction of the Project facilities in the second half of 2010 and to place the facilities in-service by
November 2011.
On behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment (“AECOM”) has prepared the following reforestation plan
in compliance with the requirements of the New Jersey No Net Loss Reforestation Act (N.J.S.A. 13:1L-
14.1 et seq.) for impacts to forested areas on New Jersey state-owned lands. The purpose of the
reforestation plan is to compensate for temporary and permanent disturbances to forested areas as a
result of the pipeline installation. This reforestation plan has been developed in accordance with the
New Jersey No Net Loss Reforestation Act and Program Guidelines (revised September 2007).
1.1 Project Description
1.1.1 Pipeline Facilities
The Loop 325 alignment is approximately 15.98 miles in length and extends west to east, traversing
Sussex and Passaic Counties in New Jersey. As detailed in Table 1.1-1 below, approximately ten miles
of Loop 325 have been sited in Sussex County with the remaining six miles associated with this loop are
located in Passaic County. The Project commences in Wantage Township and extends through Vernon
Township in Sussex County before ending in West Milford Township in Passaic County. Land uses
crossed by the Project include upland forest, wetlands, agricultural land, open land, residential and
commercial / industrial areas. To minimize new land impacts, the Project parallels Tennessee‟s existing,
maintained ROW to the extent practicable. The typical construction ROW for the Project will be 100 feet
wide and will generally consist of 25 feet of existing, permanently maintained ROW, 25 feet of new
permanent ROW, and 50 feet of temporary workspace (“TWS”). In addition to the typical 100-foot wide
construction ROW, additional temporary workspace (“ATWS”) areas will be required in specific area to
facilitate construction through portions of the route containing wetlands, steep side slopes, bedrock
outcrops, and road, railroad, and utility crossings. Appurtenant aboveground facilities associated with
the Project include main-line valves (“MLVs”) and internal inspection tool (or “pig”) launchers/receivers.
These facilities have been sited within the existing or new permanent ROW.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
1-2
July 2010
TABLE 1.1-1
PROPOSED PIPELINE FACILITIES ASSOCIATED WITH
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Mileposta Length
(miles) Township / County
Begin End
0.0 1.25 1.25 Wantage / Sussex
1.25 9.98 8.73 Vernon / Sussex
9.98 15.98 6.00 West Milford / Passaic
Total Mileage 15.98 -
a: Milepost designations measured against the individual pipeline loop
segment
TABLE 1.1-2
NEW JERSEY STATE-OWNED PROPERTIES CROSSED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Property Mileposts Townships County
Hamburg Mountain Wildlife
Management Area 4.78 – 5.97 Vernon Sussex
Waywayanda State Park 9.25-11.34;
12.28-12.79
Vernon and West
Milford
Sussex and
Passaic
Bearfort Mountain Natural Area 11.34-12.28 West Milford Passaic
Long Pond Ironworks /
Ringwood State Park
14.76 – 15.47;
15.85 – 15.96 West Milford Passaic
Each of the state owned lands listed in Table 1.1-2 above are further described in the Section 3.0 below,
including information on existing conditions, soil types, acreage impacted, reforestation planting methods
and species mixes.
1.1.2 Forest Land Assessment
Existing forested area was assessed through field surveys conducted between fall 2008 and spring
2010. Additionally, on behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment reviewed aerial photography and the
statewide GIS ½ acre grid established by NJ DEP. All forested areas proposed for disturbance were
determined to be established forest through field surveys and aerial photograph interpretation. The
acreage of established forest to be deforested is quantified by state-owned parcel in Section 3.0.
Additionally, Section 3.0 includes the amount of deforested area to be replanted on-site within each state
owned parcel. Areas not planned for replanting on-site will be compensated for in monetary payment
(See Appendix C – Monetary Compensation Form).
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-1
July 2010
2.0 General Reforestation Plan
2.1 Tree Planting Specification
Tennessee shall be liable and financially responsible for any damages to property caused by its operations.
All construction will be in accordance with the Environmental Construction Plan and Comprehensive
Mitigation Plan designed for the Project and in accordance with all federal and state approvals. All
materials, equipment and personnel shall be limited to the work area defined by the Project supervisor.
Trees shall be free of damage as the result of handling or transportation.
No substitution plant material is allowed unless written permission is obtained from the supervising botanist
prior to the delivery date of the material. Tennessee will employ a supervising botanist for oversight of
implementation of this Reforestation Plan. The supervising botanist will be a professional qualified in the
field of botany and/or forestry and will oversee plantings and any Environmental Inspectors and landscape
contractors assigned to the Project.
All work shall conform to accepted horticultural practices as ultimately determined by the supervising
botanist.
2.1.1 Scope of Work
Work shall consist of:
preparation of areas for planting;
furnishing and planting of specified trees;
maintenance of plantings until acceptance by the supervising botanist;
clean up and restoration of any disturbed areas to the condition prior to Tennessee‟s operations.
2.1.2 Scheduling of work
The landscape contractor shall submit a proposed work schedule to Tennessee for approval at least (7)
days prior to beginning operations. After the schedule is accepted, no modifications will be permitted
without written authorization from Tennessee.
The landscape contractor shall arrange to confine its operations to normal working hours for the industry
and no work will be permitted on Sundays or holidays without written authorization from Tennessee.
2.1.3 Personnel
All personnel will be properly supervised in a manner that assures that the property is protected from
damage that the safety of all personnel and the public is protected and that all contract work is done in a
professional manner and according to accepted horticultural standards.
2.1.4 Protection of Utilities
Prior to any excavation or the driving of stakes into the ground, Tennessee shall ascertain and have marked
out the location of all underground utilities. Tennessee shall take proper precautions not to disturb or
damage any sub-surface utilities.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-2
July 2010
In the event that any sub-surface utilities are uncovered or damaged, the landscape contractor shall
immediately notify Tennessee so that the contract work may be relocated or stopped until the damage can
be repaired. Tennessee shall be financially responsible for any damage to utilities and structures and shall
properly maintain the protection of same.
2.1.5 Mulch
Mulch shall be uniformly shredded hard wood, straw or salt hay. All foreign material including twigs, stones,
cans, soil, etc. shall be removed prior to seeding.
2.1.6 Layout
All trees and shrubs shall be located as shown on the plans supplied by the supervising botanist. Should
the landscape contractor encounter obstructions of any nature, he shall notify the supervising botanist who
will arrange adjustments. All adjustments to the plan must be authorized in writing.
The supervising botanist or his designee shall stake the exact planting location of each bagged and
burlapped tree in accordance with plans. The staking and layout work shall be done sufficiently in advance
of or coincident with planting to avoid delays to the landscape contractor.
No planting holes shall be excavated in advance of planting operations. The planting holes must be
approved by the supervising botanist prior to the start of the planting operation. Each plant shall be planted
in an individual hole as specified. All plants shall be set to ultimate finished grade so that they will bear the
same relationship to finished grade as they bore to the natural grade before transplanting. See the
accompanying planting diagram (Appendix G) for details.
2.1.7 Water
Plants (bagged and burlapped) located in accessible areas near public access roads shall be thoroughly
watered in after planting. Tennessee will obtain water from off-site for the landscape contractor‟s use.
2.1.8 Nursery Stock
Plant species shall conform to those indicated on the drawings, plant list, and the publication Hortus Third
(1976).
All landscape nursery stock shall conform to the standard specifications of The American Standard for
Nursery Stock sponsored by the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. All plants shall be grown under
climatic conditions similar to the job site for a period not less than two (2) years immediately prior to this
project.
No substitutions shall be permitted in either kind or grade without written authorization from the supervising
botanist.
Any materials and/or work may be rejected, if, in the opinion of the supervising botanist, it does not meet the
requirements of the specifications. All rejected material shall be promptly removed from the site by
Tennessee at its own expense.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-3
July 2010
2.1.9 Quality
Plants shall have the habit of growth that is normal for the species or cultivar and shall be sound, healthy,
vigorous, free from insects, plant diseases and injuries or damage of any nature. All plants shall be of the
grades specified, neither larger nor smaller, without written authorization from the supervising botanist. No
plants shall be pruned, clipped or trimmed prior to delivery without written authorization from the supervising
botanist. All landscape stock must be nursery grown.
All plants must be State Inspected and a copy of the “Certificate of Inspections” issued by the State
Department of Agriculture at the point of origin must accompany shipments from each source.
2.1.10 Shipment, Delivery, Inspection and acceptance
The supervising botanist reserves the right to inspect and select all plant material at its point of origin.
Acceptance at the nursery, in which the plant is growing, prior to transplanting, does not preclude rejection
at the site for just cause.
The plant material to be delivered to the site in quantities and on the dates agreed upon by the supervising
botanist. The landscape contractor shall advise the supervising botanist of all deliveries at least 48 hours
prior to its arrival at the site, so that all trees may be inspected upon delivery to the site.
All plants shall be tarped, protected from weather and be adequately packed to avoid breakage, sun scald,
windburn, desiccation and other damage during loading and shipment. All measures customary in good
trade practice shall be taken to keep the plants in good condition.
No plants shall be planted until they have been inspected and approved on site by the supervising botanist.
Legible tags shall be attached to each tree. Trees that fail to meet the specifications set forth in sections
2.1.8 and 2.1.9 will be rejected. Rejected plants shall be removed from the site immediately and approved
replacement stock that meets the specifications set forth in sections 2.1.8 and 2.1.9 will be planted in the
prescribed manner by Tennessee at its expense. Final written acceptance of the plants will be given only
after they have been planted and after the requirements prescribed herein are met.
2.1.11 Time of Planting
Prior to commencement of planting, the landscape contractor shall contact the supervising botanist to
establish a schedule of planting dates. Trees will be planted from March 1 through June 30 or September 1
through November 30.
2.1.12 Planting
Unless otherwise specified within these specifications, all work shall conform to accepted horticultural
practices as ultimately determined by the supervising botanist.
Plants shall be protected upon arrival to the site by being properly maintained until properly planted.
Unplanted stock shall be “healed-in” a bed of material approved by the supervising botanist upon delivery to
the site unless they will be planted within four (4) hours after delivery. At all times workmanlike methods
customary in good horticultural practices shall be exercised.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-4
July 2010
Tennessee shall protect all existing features on the site including underground utilities, structures and
existing trees.
Balled and burlapped trees shall be planted in pits that are a minimum of two (2‟) feet larger in diameter than
their ball of earth or their spread of roots. The depth of the pits shall be equal to the depth of the root ball
after proper planting. The tree shall be centered in the hole and then back filled one half the depth of the
soil ball with topsoil. The backfill shall be lightly but thoroughly tamped and well watered. The remainder of
the hole is then to be backfilled with approved topsoil to a depth that after settling will assure the tree will be
at the same level it was previously growing at in the nursery. Balled and burlapped trees planted near
public access roads will be well watered again before mulch is placed over the surface of the root ball.
2.1.13 Guying, Staking and wrapping
The installation of tree stakes and supporting materials will be done to those trees that the supervising
botanist deems necessary. Stakes shall be made of wood, of the length and size required to restrict
excessive movement by the tree, as ultimately determined by the supervising botanist. Tie materials shall
be plastic chain lock or flat, woven webbing designed specifically for staking trees. For details on proper
staking, see the planting diagram. Tree trunks shall not be wrapped.
2.1.14 Planting preparations
Prior to back filling, balled and burlapped trees shall have burlap and twine removed from around the trunks,
stems and tops of the balls. The burlap shall be peeled back off the top of the ball, or if bulky, cut away and
removed from the upper-three quarters of the soil ball. No burlap shall be pulled out from underneath the
ball.
At least the upper two-thirds of the wire basket shall be removed from the root balls after the trees are set in
the planting pit by cutting with any tool that does not destroy the integrity of the root ball or injure the roots.
The remaining lower section of the wire basket shall be flattened as much as possible in the planting hole.
Backfilling shall be lightly but thoroughly tamped and well watered as described under planting. Only the
prescribed approved topsoil may be used to backfill the holes during planting preparations. Unsuitable
excavated material, as designated by the supervising botanist shall be removed from the site by Tennessee
at its expense.
2.1.15 Mulching
Straw, salt hay, or shredded hardwood mulch supplied by the landscape contractor shall be free of debris
and shall be placed by the landscape contractor around all plantings at the time of planting to a depth of
three (3”) inches as shown in the planting diagram. Care shall be exercised to keep mulch two (2”) inches
away from the bases of all plantings. After the mulching operation has been approved by the supervising
botanist, the mulch shall be thoroughly watered, in areas near public access roads.
2.1.16 Pruning
The landscape contractor shall not prune any plant.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-5
July 2010
2.1.17 Clean up
During the course of operations, the Tennessee shall remove from the property at its expense all excess
waste materials. Any damaged lawn areas or planting areas will be restored to their original conditions by
Tennessee at its own expense, if such damage is the result of Tennessee‟s operations.
2.1.18 Inspections for acceptance
Inspection: Tennessee shall notify the NJ DEP Division of Parks and Forestry when planting is completed
and shall request an inspection in order to determine whether or not the Project meets the specifications
contained herein. If the work is acceptable, a written notice shall be provided stating so. If deficiencies are
found in the work, a list of items requiring attention shall be furnished to Tennessee by the NJ DEP.
Tennessee shall correct the deficiencies within ten (10) days and a re-inspection shall be made. This
procedure will continue until the work is found acceptable.
The Forest Service and a representative of the state entity shall inspect the reforestation Project after two
years to determine the health and vitality of the reforestation stock.
Acceptance: After inspection, Tennessee will be notified in writing by the NJ DEP of the acceptance of all
work.
2.2 Upland Forest Restoration
The approach to upland forest reforestation within New Jersey state-owned properties involves a
combination of impact minimization during construction and vegetation re-establishment involving natural,
successional processes as a key component. Tennessee believes that this approach will best minimize
the long-term impacts to forested uplands and facilitate the development of an upland forest with a
vegetation community composed of species best suited for the site and successional stage. Tennessee‟s
reforestation plan is based upon principles outlined within the No Net Loss Reforestation Act (P.L. 1993,
c106 C.13:1L-14.2) and shall be limited to those forested upland areas within designated temporary
workspace. Impact minimization measures to be implemented during construction activities include:
Minimize the amount of tree clearing to the maximum extent practicable while still allowing for
safe construction of the pipeline. Although Tennessee has requested a typical 100-foot
construction ROW, where possible as determined by the EI, selected trees along the edge of the
various corridors may be preserved to help minimize impacts. To the extent practicable (typically
in areas that will not require significant grading), trees and brush will be cut and/or ground just
above or to ground level, leaving the stumps and root systems intact. Stumps will be removed in
areas where significant grading is required and as necessary to maintain safe working conditions.
Treating stumps and root systems in this manner will promote the potential for re-sprouting in
some species in areas of temporary / additional temporary workspace.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-6
July 2010
Re-establishment of forest will be performed using a combination of plantings and natural,
successional processes. A variety of plantings and seed mixes are proposed to stabilize and restore
the temporary workspace utilized during construction to quickly stabilize the area and ensure the
short-term establishment of a native, non-invasive plant community and long-term re-establishment of
a forested cover type. Diversity in species composition is critical to reduce the risk of widespread loss
of trees to single insect and disease infestation. Therefore, similar species should not exceed 30
percent of the total planting. Components of the reforestation plan include:
o Restoration planting densities of 1,210 individuals (tree species) per-acre within upland
forests and 100 individuals (shrub species) per acre in areas with shallow depth to
bedrock. Eight hundred individuals per-acre will be planted in areas with deeper soils.
Tree species will consist of two to three foot whip-sized individuals in a variety of native
upland species obtained from a reputable plant nursery. Seedlings will be planted in
areas of shallow depth to bedrock / high rock fragment content. No cultivars or other
ornamental sub-species will be allowed as substitutes. Alternatively, 2-2.5 inch caliper
trees will be utilized on sites with vehicle access near roadways and other public access
areas planted at 208 individuals per acre.
o To ensure successful completion of the reforestation plan and increased survivorship of
individual plantings, Tennessee will conduct the planting in early- to mid-fall 2011
following completion of Project construction. If actual construction timeframes do not
accommodate a fall 2011 planting schedule, Tennessee shall conduct the planting as
soon as practicable within the 2012 growing season with the understanding that
installation of the plantings will be logistically impractical during inundated conditions that
typically occur during early spring, while planting during drought or excessively hot
conditions typically occurring in early- to mid-summer will greatly increase the potential
for individual mortality due to heat or water stress and where supplemental irrigation of
plantings is impractical if not impossible.
o Planting will be conducted by a qualified and reputable landscape contractor contracted
by Tennessee to provide oversight of the reforestation activities. The landscape
contractor will work under the direction of the supervising botanist. The landscape
contractor will be provided a copy of the Reforestation Plan and will be apprised of
Tennessee‟s obligations under the plan and applicable NJ DEP permit conditions.
o Any inadvertent impacts that occur during restoration planting activities, including but not
limited to impacts outside of permitted work limits or excessive soil rutting, shall be
restored to pre-existing conditions as soon as practicable.
o Spacing of individual seedlings at approximately six foot by six foot spacing will be
conducted so as to maintain consistent areal canopy coverage and adequate sun
exposure as the plantings grow and mature. Additionally, consistent pre-determined
spacing of individuals will ensure thorough and adequate replanting of the entire
disturbed area, as well as limit the potential for confusion and subjective in-field spacing
decisions by planting laborers.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-7
July 2010
If the timing of final grading and restoration activities associated with pipeline construction does
not coincide with that of the planned restoration planting schedule, or site conditions and soil
temperature are not appropriate for transplantation and seed germination, the mitigation area will
be temporarily seeded with annual ryegrass at an application rate of 40 pounds/acre and
stabilized with 2 to 4 inches of straw mulch, which equates to an application rate of three
tons/acre, and subsequently planted at an appropriate time.
Plantings will be accomplished through the use of plant stocks chosen for their compatibility with
the local environment. Commercially available plants and seeds will be utilized to accomplish this
goal. The planting plan has been designed to provide a variety of plant species to promote
species richness, enhance wildlife habitat, and help to “jump start” restoration of the forest
community within the temporary workspace impacted during construction activities.
Spacing of individual plants will be conducted so as to maintain consistent areal canopy coverage
and adequate sun exposure as the plantings grow and mature. Consistent pre-determined
spacing of approximately six feet by six feet of tree species individuals will ensure thorough and
adequate densities and replanting of the entire mitigation area, as well as limit the potential for
confusion and subjective in-field spacing decisions by planting laborers. However, final spacing
and placement of the plantings may be determined in the field. Should supplemental irrigation of
restoration plantings be required due to climatic conditions at the time of planting and immediately
thereafter, the landscape contractor will be required to maintain adequate hydration to support the
plantings until successful establishment.
To reduce the immediate threat and minimize the long-term potential of degradation, the species
included in the document An Overview of Non-Indigenous Plant Species in New Jersey published
by the NJ DEP (2004) shall not be included as planting stock in the overall Project. Only plant
materials native and indigenous to the region shall be used. Species not specified in the
reforestation plan shall not be used without prior written approval from NJ DEP.
Tennessee will conduct post-construction monitoring of all forested areas affected by construction for
three years (or until receipt of a notice of compliance) to assess the condition of vegetation and the
success of restoration. As a component of the monitoring program, Tennessee will perform quantitative
sampling to determine the type and quantity of tree and shrub species naturally colonizing and re-
sprouting in the construction ROW. At the end of the each growing season, the results of the field
monitoring will be compared to pre-determined threshold success criteria (80% survival for seedlings,
90% survival for whips, 95% survival for bagged and burlapped individuals). Restoration shall be
considered successful if upon visual survey the density and cover of non-nuisance vegetation are similar
in density and cover to adjacent undisturbed land. Yearly monitoring reports shall be submitted to the NJ
DEP Division of Parks and Forestry at the end of each growing season. These success criteria will
identify quantities of native woody species that would be considered necessary to ensure successful
forested restoration. If actual field stem counts fall short of the pre-determined threshold values,
Tennessee will develop supplemental plans in conjunction with the appropriate state and federal
agencies. Areas that do not meet the minimum survival rate percentage shall have all unhealthy stock
replaced within 120 days of receiving notification from the NJ Forest Service. Inspections and
replacement plantings shall continue with the same time frames until the minimum survival rate is
achieved.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-8
July 2010
The species to be included in the reforestation plan for a specific location will be based on those identified
as naturally colonizing and succeeding within the Project ROW in state-owned properties. By mimicking
natural processes and site ecology, and planting appropriate species at the appropriate successional
stage, efforts to promote restoration of forested areas will be maximized. Species identified within the
Project workspace on state-owned properties are listed in Section 3.0. Through post-construction
monitoring, the site will dictate which species will be better suited for supplemental planting so effort and
cost will not be wasted planting species maladapted to the site conditions.
Specifications for species, planting stock size and quality, stem quantity and spacing, and planting method
has been developed according to the Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey
(Vodak undated). According to this document, spacing closer than six feet by six feet is not
recommended because more closely spaced trees can shade the bare ground too quickly, reducing or
eliminating grasses and other ground cover. Tree species planted will consist of seedlings less than two
feet tall in areas with rock fragments and/or shallow depth to bedrock. In areas with deeper soils and less
rock fragments tree species planted will consist of two to three foot-tall whips and shrubs planted will
consist of half to one foot-tall whips. Seedlings have been selected as the preferred product type due to
the amount of plants needed to be transported into the area for planting and due to the presence of
shallow depth to bedrock in a large portion of the replanting area. Utilizing larger sized tree plants would
increase the foot and vehicle traffic along the ROW, which would increase the amount and duration of
disturbance to vegetation and soils within the ROW. Additionally, larger sized plants would be difficult to
plant successfully in areas of shallow depth to bedrock and high rock fragment content. Larger trees will
be planted in areas with deeper soils and easy access for construction vehicles. Additionally, these areas
will likely have easy access for the public and planting of larger trees will limit the amount of time required
to more closely mimic natural conditions and coverage. Implementation of the supplemental planting
program, if necessary, will occur during the spring following the end of the second growing season.
TABLE 2.2-1
PLANT SPECIES COMPOSITION OF SEED MIXES FOR UPLAND MITIGATION ACTIVITIES
FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Seed Mix Common Name (Scientific name)
Native Upland Wildlife
Forage and Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company)
Virginia Wild Rye (Elymus virginicus) Fowl Bluegrass (Poa palustris)
Little Bluestem (Schizachyrium scoparium) Big Bluestem (Andropogon gerardii)
Switchgrass (Panicum virgatum) Black Eyed Susan (Rudbeckia hirta)
Indiangrass (Sorghastrum nutans) Showy Tick-Trefoil (Desmodium
canadense)
Eastern Gamma Grass (Tripsacum dactyloides) Ox Eye Sunflower (Heliopsis
helianthoides)
Northeast Upland Wildlife
Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
Switch-grass (Panicum virgatum) Oats (Avena sativa)
Big Blue-stem (Andropogon gerardii) Broom-Sedge (Andropogon virginicus)
Little Bluestem (Schizachyrium scoparium) Fox-Tail Bristle Grass (Setaria italica)
Round-headed Lespedeza (Lespedeza capitata)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-9
July 2010
2.3 ROW Restoration and Monitoring Plan
The ROW Restoration and Monitoring Plan developed for Loop 325 will incorporate measures outlined in
the Comprehensive Mitigation Plan (“CMP”) and Tennessee‟s 300 Line Environmental Construction
Project for New Jersey (“ECP”), which incorporates the FERC‟s Plan and Procedures. The purpose is to
support multiple environmental and operational safety objectives for the proposed Loop 325 ROW,
including areas through the Highlands Region and New Jersey state-owned properties. The CMP
supports management techniques for maintaining high water quality standards including minimizing
impacts to riparian zone vegetation and wetland communities crossed by Loop 325 during construction
and maintaining vegetation and hydrology in these communities post-construction.
Long-term impacts to successional habitats will be limited to forest and scrub-shrub areas during
operation of the Project facilities. The siting of the alignment along a previously disturbed and maintained
pipeline corridor was the preferred alternative as it reduces the clearing of forested areas during
construction and minimizes the potential for habitat fragmentation. In areas where workspace within
forested areas is unavoidable, the forested areas will be cleared, and standard erosion control/cover
species will be planted after construction is completed. Temporary workspace that was identified as forest
during the field surveys will be allowed to revert to forest. Areas that are already vegetated with grasses
or early successional species will be restored after the conclusion of construction activities.
Impacts within the temporary workspace will be allowed to revert to forest post-construction. The primary
impact minimization measure to reduce the impact of the Project on forested uplands consists of locating
the proposed pipeline loop segments within the existing cleared ROW to the extent practicable to limit the
extent of forest clearing required for construction and operation of the facilities. Additionally, Tennessee
has located ATWS areas outside of forested land where possible to further minimize impacts. Impact
minimization, post-construction restoration methods, and long-term maintenance for the ROW are
described in the following sections.
2.3.1 Site Preparation, Clearing and Construction
The following techniques and standards will be adhered to during site preparation and construction to
minimize impacts to vegetated communities crossed by Loop 325:
Delineation and marking of wetlands and waterbodies prior to the commencement of
construction.
In wetlands, stumps shall be removed only in the trenchline except where construction constraints
or safety concerns require their removal.
Installing temporary erosion control measures such as silt fence and/or hay bale barriers.
No rubber-tired equipment will be allowed to work in wetlands unless it will not damage the root
systems and its use is approved by the EI. Bulldozers will not be used for clearing. Trees and
brush will be cut by hand at ground level by hydroaxes, tree shears, grinders or chain saws.
Within wetlands, the minimum clearing necessary to safely construct the pipeline will be done. As
many trees as possible will be left on stream banks. The frequency of machine movement across
riparian zones and stream ecosystems will be minimized.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-10
July 2010
Within wetlands, Tennessee will use amphibious excavators (pontoon mounted backhoes) or
tracked backhoes (supported by fabricated timber mats) to dig trenches.
Within wetlands, grading will be limited to the areas directly over the trenchline, except where
topography requires additional grading for safety reasons. Where grading is required, topsoil will
be segregated and returned as an even layer to all graded areas.
A trained EI will be employed to oversee wetland construction and monitor erosion and
sedimentation controls.
2.3.2 Post-construction restoration and revegetation
Restoration and revegetation of the ROW incorporates permanent erosion and sediment control
measures. However, in the event that final restoration cannot occur in a timely manner due to weather or
soil conditions, temporary erosion and sediment control measures will be maintained until the weather is
suitable for final cleanup and revegetation. In no case shall final cleanup be delayed beyond the end of
the next recommended seeding season.
2.3.2.1 Temporary Erosion Control
Stabilization measures shall be initiated as soon as practical on upland portions of the ROW
where activities have temporarily or permanently ceased except when the initiation of stabilization
measures by the seventh day is precluded by weather. Stabilization measures shall be initiated
as soon as machinery is able to obtain access to the ROW.
Stabilization of waterbodies and wetlands shall be initiated immediately after backfilling, weather
permitting.
If construction is completed more than 20 days before the perennial vegetation seeding season,
the construction work area shall be mulched with three tons/acre of straw, or its equivalent
Temporary upland plantings will be fertilized in accordance with Tennessee‟s ECP.
All temporary sediment barriers will be removed when an area is successfully revegetated (i.e.,
when the ROW surface condition is similar to adjacent undisturbed lands), or when permanent
erosion controls are installed.
2.3.2.2 Permanent Restoration Methods
Permanent restoration of waterbodies and wetlands shall be initiated immediately after backfilling,
weather permitting. Tables 2.5-1 and 2.5-2 provide information for plant species composition for
wetlands and riparian zones.
Final grading shall be completed, including topsoil replacement and permanent erosion control
measures, within 20 days after backfilling the trench (ten day in residential areas), weather
permitting. Table 9.2-5 of the ECP (Appendix H) provides seeding and fertilizer application rates
for permanent restoration of uplands in New Jersey.
Construction debris shall be removed from the ROW and the ROW shall be graded so that the
soil is left in the proper condition for planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-11
July 2010
Where trench compaction has not been done, the ROW shall be graded to pre-construction
contours, as practical, with a small crown of soil left over the ditch (except in waterbodies) to
compensate for settling, but not to interfere with natural drainage.
Where topsoil has been segregated, the topsoil shall be spread back along the ROW in an even
layer.
Permanent water bars shall be constructed to the same specifications as temporary water bars
after final grading and prior to seeding.
Permanent water bars will be constructed to replace temporary erosion control barriers upslope of
road and railroad crossings, and on both sides of all wetland and waterbody crossings, where
appropriate.
Within 30 days of the in-service date of the Project facilities, Tennessee will prepare a summary
report identifying:
o quantity and type of fertilizer, seed and mulch used;
o the amount of lime applied (if required);
o the equipment used to implement this process;
o the acreage treated;
o the dates of backfilling and seeding;
o the number of landowners specifying other seeding requirements and a description of the
requirements;
o and any problem areas, and how they were addressed.
2.3.2.3 Revegetation and Seeding
The ROW shall be limed, fertilized, seeded, and mulched in accordance with the ECP, unless
otherwise requested by the landowner. Fertilizer, lime and mulch will not be used within wetlands
unless required in writing by the appropriate land management or state agency. Where possible,
lime and fertilizer will be incorporated into the top 2 inches of soil. If seeding cannot be done
within the recommended seeding dates, temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be used
and seeding of permanent cover shall be done at the beginning of the next growing season.
The ROW will be seeded within 20 working days (ten days in residential areas) of final grading in
accordance with recommended seeding dates, weather and soil conditions permitting. Seeding
must utilize native species and must target habitat type and function.
Turf, ornamental shrubs and other landscaping materials shall be restored in accordance with
landowner agreements.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-12
July 2010
Where broadcast or hydro-seeding is to be done, the seedbed will be scarified to ensure sites for
seeds to lodge and germinate.
Where hand broadcast seeding is used, the seed shall be applied at one-half the rate in each of
two separate passes. The passes will be made perpendicular to each other to ensure complete
and uniform coverage.
The seedbed will be prepared to depth of three-to-four inches using appropriate equipment to
provide a firm, smooth seedbed, free of debris.
Slopes steeper than 3:1 shall be stabilized immediately after final grading in accordance with
recommended seeding dates, weather permitting.
Seed shall be purchased in accordance with the Pure Live Seed (“PLS”) specifications for seed
mixes and used within 12 months of testing.
Legume seed will be treated with species-specific inoculants per manufacturer‟s specifications.
The seed shall be applied and covered uniformly per local soil conservation authorities‟
recommendations, depending on seed size. A seed drill equipped with a cultipacker is preferred,
but broadcast or hydro-seeding may be used at double the recommended seeding rates. Where
broadcast seeding is used, the seedbed shall be firmed after seeding.
Other alternative seed mixes specifically requested by the landowner or land-managing agency
may be used.
A travel lane may be left open temporarily to allow access by construction traffic if the temporary
erosion control structures are installed, inspected and maintained as specified. When access is
no longer required, the travel lane shall be removed, decompaction of the travel lane will occur,
and the travel lane restored.
Habitat for threatened and endangered species may be created through modifications of existing
habitat conditions for species such as the bog turtle.
Access roads would be graded to support access and planted with an interspersion of warm
grass species that can be used to delineate the roadway from the maturing shrub species and
cultivars of low and slow growing tree species which will not need to be trimmed.
2.3.2.4 Mulching
Where mulching is permitted, mulch will be applied according to Tennessee‟s ECP on the entire
ROW except lawns, agricultural (crop) areas, and areas where hydro-mulch is used.
If construction or restoration activity is interrupted for extended periods (more than 20 days),
mulch will be applied before seeding.
If mulching before seeding, mulch application will be increased on all slopes within 100 feet of
waterbodies and wetlands to a rate of three tons/acre.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-13
July 2010
Up to one ton/acre of wood chips may be added to mulch if areas are top-dressed with 11
pounds/acre of available nitrogen, 50% of which must be slow release.
If a mulch blower is used, the strands of the mulching material shall be at least 8 inches long to
allow anchoring.
Mulch shall be anchored immediately after placement on steep slopes and stream banks. Slopes
that are too steep for crimping with tracked equipment or a mulch anchoring tool (i.e., slopes
>15%) will be anchored manually by the use of matting or netting.
When mechanically anchoring mulch, a mulch anchoring tool or tracked equipment will be used to
crimp the mulch to a depth of two-to-three inches.
When anchoring with liquid mulch binders, use rates recommended by the manufacturer. Liquid
mulch binders will not be used within 100 feet of wetlands or waterbodies.
2.3.2.5 Matting/Netting/Erosion Control Fabric
Matting or netting consists of jute, wood excelsior, or similar materials, and is used to anchor
mulch and stabilize the surface of the soil during the critical period of vegetative establishment, as
directed by the EI. Specific manufacturer‟s installation instructions should be followed to ensure
proper performance of the product.
Matting or netting will be applied to critical, sensitive areas (i.e., steep slopes [typically slopes
>15%], banks of waterbodies, bar ditches, etc.), as specified by the EI. Matting or netting will also
be applied to any areas where temporary/permanent vegetation is not taking/working to assist is
protecting the seed bank.
Matting or netting will be anchored with pegs or staples.
2.4 Post-Construction Monitoring (Standard Construction)
For three years following construction, or until a notice of compliance is received, Tennessee will
file with the NJ DEP annual monitoring reports documenting restoration of the jurisdictional
resource areas, any problems experienced (including those identified by the landowner) and
corrective actions taken, as well as how the restoration is working to protect and promote the
resource area functions and values.
Tennessee will conduct follow-up inspections after the first three growing seasons following
seeding and replanting to determine the success of revegetation. Revegetation will be
considered successful if non-nuisance vegetation is similar in density to adjacent undisturbed
lands, based on representative random sampling in the field (e.g., visual survey). If vegetative
cover is not successful or if there is a need for noxious weed control measures, an experienced
agronomist shall be used to determine the need for additional restoration measures.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-14
July 2010
Tennessee will use one or more of the following measures in cooperation with the landowner, if
warranted or required, relative to off-road vehicles:
o posting, as necessary, appropriate signage;
o installing a locking gate with fencing to prevent bypassing the gate;
o in extremely sensitive areas, planting conifers or other appropriate shallow-rooted trees
and/or shrubs across the ROW except where access is required for Tennessee‟s use.
The spacing of trees and/or shrubs and length of ROW planted will make a reasonable
effort to prevent unauthorized vehicle access and screen the ROW from view. A gate
may be used in conjunction with the screening. This method will be used only when
reflected on site-specific plans or other specifications; or
o installing a barrier across the ROW consisting of slash and timber, piping, a line of
boulders or a combination thereof.
Signs, gates, and marker posts shall be maintained as necessary
2.5 Specialized Methods
2.5.1 Palustrine Forested Wetlands
The Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States (Cowardin et al. 1979) was
used to classify wetlands delineated within the survey area in New Jersey state-owned lands. Forested
wetlands identified were classified as Palustrine Forested (“PFO”).
Palustrine systems include all non-tidal wetlands that are dominated by trees, shrubs, persistent emergents,
emergent mosses or lichens, and all wetlands that occur in tidal areas where salinity due to ocean-derived
salts is below 0.5 percent salinity. The palustrine system was developed to group vegetated wetlands
commonly referred to as marshes, swamps, bogs, and prairies. This system includes ponds and may be
situated shoreward of lakes, river channels, estuaries, river floodplains, in isolated catchments, or on slopes
(Cowardin et al. 1979). All of the wetland resource areas identified along the Project alignment are
classified as palustrine systems.
Forested wetlands are characterized by woody vegetation that is six meters (approximately 18 feet) tall or
taller and normally include an overstory of trees, an understory of young trees or shrubs, and an herbaceous
layer. According to the Classification of Wetlands and Deepwater Habitats of the United States (Cowardin
et al. 1979), forested wetland areas in which the canopy is closed or nearly closed, with 60% to 100% tree
cover are classified as palustrine forest. Shrubs may be present in these areas but they do not dominate
the community.
Tennessee has developed a Wetland Mitigation Plan (“Mitigation Plan”) as part of its application for an
Individual Freshwater Wetlands and Flood Hazard Area permit. Wetland restoration measures will be
conducted in accordance with the Mitigation Plan as approved by NJ DEP, except as further specified in
this Reforestation Plan. Palustrine Forested Wetlands impacted by the Project within New Jersey state-
owned lands and proposed for reforestation will be reforested in accordance with the applicable plant lists
in Section 3.0. Additionally, the seed mixes identified in Table 2.5-1 and Table 2.5-2 will be applied to
PFO wetlands impacted by the Project in New Jersey state-owned properties.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-15
July 2010
TABLE 2.5-1 PLANT SPECIES COMPOSITION OF SEED MIXES
FOR WETLAND REFORESTATION FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Seed Mix Common Name Scientific name
New England Wet Mix from
New England Wetland Plants, Inc.
Fox Sedge Carex vulpinoidea
Hop Sedge Carex lupulina
Water Plantain Alisma plantagoaquatica
Nodding Bur-marigold Bidens cernua
Lurid Sedge Carex lurida
Soft Rush Juncus effusus
Grass-leaved Goldenrod Solidago graminifolia
Bristly Sedge Carex cosmosa
Fringed Sedge Carex crinita
Boneset Eupatorium perfoliatum
Flat-top Aster Aster umbellatus
Hardstem Bulrush Scirpus acutus
Green Bulrush Scirpus atrovirens
Woolgrass Scirpus cyperinus
Spotted Joe-pye Weed Eupatorium maculatum
Blue Vervain Verbana hastata
Ditch Stonecrop Penthorum sedoides
Northeast Wetland Diversity Mix
from Southern Tier Consultinga
Green Bulrush Scirpus atrovirens
Monkey Flower Mimulus ringens
Reed Meadowgrass Glyceria grandis
Rice Cut Grass Leersia orysoides
Common Sneezeweed Helenium autumnale
Canada Mannagrass Glyceria canadensis
New England Aster Aster novae-angliae
Water Plantain Alisma plantago-aquatica
Wrinkled Goldenrod Solidago rugosa
Straw colored Flatsedge Cyperus strigosus
Purple Stemmed Aster Aster puniceus
Buttonbush Cephalanthus occidentalis
Soft Stem Bulrush Scirpus tabernaemontanii
Flat-Top White Aster Aster umbellatus
Giant Goldenrod Solidago gigantea
Deertongue Panicum clandestinum
Water Parsnip Sium suave
Small Fruited Bulrush Scirpus microcarpus
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-16
July 2010
TABLE 2.5-1 PLANT SPECIES COMPOSITION OF SEED MIXES
FOR WETLAND REFORESTATION FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Seed Mix Common Name Scientific name
Water Hemlock Cicuta maculata
Wild Rye Elymus canadensis
Devil’s Beggar-Ticks Bidens frondosa
Purple-Stem Angelica Angelica atropurpurea
Water Dock Rumex verticillatus
Pennsylvania Smartweed Polygonum pensylvanicum
Swamp Milkweed Asclepias incarnata
Riverbank Wild Rye Elymus riparius
Blue Flag Iris versicolor
a: Seeds collected from western New York and northwestern Pennsylvania. Wetland Diversity mix includes
some of the species also present in the New England Wet Mix.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-17
July 2010
TABLE 2.5-2 PLANT SPECIES COMPOSITION OF SEED MIXES
FOR RIPARIAN ZONE REFORESTATION FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Seed Mix Common Name Scientific name
Riparian Buffer Mix from Ernst
Seeds
Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii
Common Milkweed Asclepias syriaca
Blue False Indigo Baptisia autralis
Fox Sedge Carex vulpinoidea
Partridge Pea Chamaecrista fasciculata
Silky Dogwood Cornus amomum
Showy Tick Trefoil Desmodium canadense
Riverbank Wild Rye Elymus riparius
Virginia Wild Rye Elymus virginicus
Joe Pye Weed Eupatorium fistulosum
Spotted Joe Pye Weed Eupatorium maculatum
Boneset Eupatorium perfoliatum
Grass Leaved Goldenrod Euthamia graminifolia
Ox Eye Sunflower Heliopsis helianthoides
Soft Rush Juncus effusus
Wild Bergamot Monarda fistulosa
Deer Tongue Panicum clandestinum
Switchgrass Panicum virgatum
Tall White Beard Tongue Penstemon digitalis
Staghorn Sumac Rhus typhina
Black Eyed Susan Rudbeckia hirta
Little Bluestem Schizachyrium scoparium
Indiangrass Sorghastrum nutans
Blue Vervain Verbena hastata
Giant Ironweed Vernonia gigantea
Arrow Wood Viburnum dentatum
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2-18
July 2010
2.5.2 Upland Forest Seed Mixes
In addition to the Plant Lists in Section 3.0, specialized seed mixes will be applied to upland forest
proposed for reforestation within New Jersey state-owned lands. A specialized seed mix will be made for
each of the upland community types identified in Section 3.0. The specialized seed mixes will contain the
seeds identified in Table 2.5-3, as well as seeds for tree species identified in the community type plant list.
Specialized tree species seeds will be chosen and applied at a rate as available. Application of the tree
seeds will help build a seed bank within the forest floor, and will allow seedlings to sprout were conditions
are more favorable for growth.
TABLE 2.5-3
NEW JERSEY PERMANENT UPLAND REFORESTATION
SEED AND FERTILIZER RATESa
Type Rate (lbs/acre)
Seed
Spreading fescue 13
Red fescue 13
Kentucky Bluegrass 26
Perennial ryegrass 9
Fertilizer 10-20-10 500
Agricultural Limestone Ground 6000
3800 slow-release nitrogen 300
mulch Straw or salt hay 3500
a: These are standard rates and subject to modification as requested by New Jersey state agencies.
2.5.3 Areas with Moderate to Poor Suitability for Planting
Many of the soils types in the area planned for reforestation have thin topsoil layers, shallow depth to
bedrock and / or high rock fragment content. In these areas, digging adequate sized holes for whip and
bagged and burlapped plants would be difficult or restrictive. Additionally, if able to plant larger sized
individuals in these areas, survivability would be expected to be low due to lack of topsoil. Planting
seedlings in these areas would increase survivability in that seedlings would be able to grow a root structure
within and around the existing rocks and fragments. In this manner the planted seedlings would be able to
establish a root structure adapted to the existing soil conditions as opposed to planting an individual with a
root system previously adapted to deeper soils.
2.5.4 Eastern Hemlock / Oak Community
Through Project planning and discussions with the NJ DEP, availability of Eastern hemlock (Tsuga
Canadensis) stock has been identified as a concern for reforesting areas identified as Eastern hemlock /
Oak communities in Section 3.0. In anticipation of a low supply of Eastern hemlock stock, Tennessee will
harvest and maintain Eastern hemlock seedlings during the clearing phase of construction. Eastern
hemlock seedlings will only be harvested within portions of the ROW proposed for clearing and will be
maintained in a condition so that they are suitable for planting post-construction. Additionally, in areas of
Eastern hemlock / oak forest community types, topsoil will be segregated to maintain the existing seedbank
and promote regeneration. Stockpiled topsoil will be replaced after backfilling the trench with subsoil.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-1
July 2010
3.0 State Owned Properties
3.1 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area
3.1.1 Existing Forested Area
Upland Forest
On behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment surveyed the portion of Loop 325 within Hamburg Mountain
Wildlife Management Area („Hamburg WMA”) from September through December in 2008 to identify
wetlands and watercourses. Surveys continued into 2010 for rare species and community types. Existing
upland forest crossed by Loop 325 within the Hamburg WMA consists of the Red Oak/Sweet Birch
Community. Dominant tree species include red oak (Quercus rubra), sweet birch (Betula lenta), black oak
(Quercus velutina), sugar maple (Acer saccharum), Eastern hemlock (Tsuga Canadensis) and black cherry
(Prunus serotina). Dominant shrub species identified include witch-hazel (Hamamelis virginiana), black
huckleberry (Gaylussacia baccata), mountain laurel (Kalmia latifolia) and maple leaf viburnum (Viburnum
acerifolium). The red oak/sweet birch forest community type found within the Hamburg WMA was
determined to be established forest as defined by the New Jersey No Net Loss Reforestation Act Program
Guidelines (2007) (“the Guidelines”) through field surveys and review of aerial photography. Aerial
photographs of the Project area in the Hamburg WMA are included in Appendix E.
TABLE 3.1-1
FOREST COMMUNITY TYPES IMPACTED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Community Type Mileposts Crossed Total Distance Crossed (miles)
Red Oak/Sweet Birch Upland
Forest
4.78 – 5.41 0.63
5.79 – 5.85 0.06
W024 5.44 – 5.79 0.35
(Horizontal Directional Drill)
Tennessee will reforest 8.61 of the 9.74 acres deforested on-site within the Project workspace. Table 3.1-2
identifies the acres of existing forest within the Project ROW that will be temporarily and permanently
impacted. Acreage under Additional Temporary Workspace (“ATWS”) and Temporary Workspace (“TWS”)
are proposed for reforestation. Acreage in the permanent column quantifies the acreage of existing forest
that will be maintained in a scrub-shrub state post-construction. The total acres permanently converted to
scrub-shrub will be compensated for in monetary payment (see Appendix C) and through reforestation of
portions of the ROW within Hamburg WMA not within the ½ acre grids determined to contain 33 percent or
more canopy cover. See Appendix E for a depiction of the Project area overlain with the NJ DEP statewide
½ acre grid system, and grids highlighted as containing existing forested area. Table 5.0-1 includes
additional acreage to be reforested in accordance with this plan, outside the grids determined to contain 33
percent or more forest cover.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-2
July 2010
TABLE 3.1-2
IMPACTS TO DEFORESTED AREAS
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Forest Type Acres Deforested
ATWS TWS Perma
Total
Red Oak /
Sweet Birch 5.57 3.04 1.13 9.74
Total 5.57 3.04 1.13 9.74
a: Includes impacts associated with new permanent easement.
3.1.2 Suitability for Planting
The USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007), NRCS Soil Data Mart (2010) and field surveys were used to
assess the suitability of the deforested area for replanting. Areas of shallow depth to bedrock have been
identified within the Project area in Hamburg WMA through field surveys conducted by AECOM
Environment and review of the USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007).
Review of the NRCS soil data mart provided suitability ratings for planting on soil types found within the
Project area. Ratings are based on slope, depth to a restrictive layer, content of sand, plasticity index, rock
fragments on or below the surface, depth to a water table, and ponding. From review of this data, the main
limitation to planting in the Project area identified was the presence of rock fragments. Areas with a high
rock fragment content and/or shallow depth to bedrock create unfavorable conditions for replanting larger
sized plants and can result in poor survival rates. These areas are present on mountainous terrain on steep
slopes and along ridgelines. As a result, seedlings are the preferred product type for re-planting in areas
identified as moderate or poorly suited for hand planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-3
July 2010
TABLE 3.1-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
ChkE
4.78-4.89
5.09-5.15
5.29-5.35
5.74-5.83
5.87-5.92
Chatfield 45
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
Unsuited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Hollis 30
Poorly suited
(Rock
fragments,
slope)
Unsuited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Rock Outcrop 20 Not Rated Not Rated
HncD
4.89-5.09
5.15-5.29
5.65-5.67
Hollis 45
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
Unsuited (rock
fragments,
slope)
Rock Outcrop 30 Not Rated Not Rated
Chatfield 20
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
Unsuited (rock
fragments,
slope)
ChkC 5.35-5.38
5.96-5.97
Chatfield 45
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
Unsuited (rock
fragments,
slope)
Hollis 30
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
Unsuited (rock
fragments,
slope)
Rock Outcrop 25 Not Rated Not Rated
CatbA
5.38-5.65
5.67-5.74
5.83-5.87
Catden 85
Moderately
suited
(sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(sandiness)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-4
July 2010
TABLE 3.1-4
SHALLOW DEPTH TO BEDROCK AREAS FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Mileposts with
Shallow Depth to
Bedrocka
Linear Distance Crossed (miles)
4.78 – 5.38 0.60
5.65 – 5.67 0.02
5.74 – 5.83 0.09
5.87 – 5.92 0.05
5.96 – 5.97 0.01
Total miles 0.77
a: Areas of shallow bedrock are those with bedrock within five feet from the surface.
b: Source: USDA 2007
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-5
July 2010
3.1.3 Soils and Topography
Soil types crossed by Loop 325 in the Hamburg WMA were identified using the NRCS Soil Data Mart and
Web Soil Survey information for the Sussex and Passaic County Soil Survey Areas available on-line (NRCS
2008a & b) and are listed in Table 3.1-5. Topography along Loop 325 ranges from approximately 1,000 to
1,460 feet above sea level. Soil types that have moderate to severe erosion potential due to slope are
identified in Table 3.1-5. Areas along Loop 325 within Hamburg WMA where ground surveys and review of
USGS topographic mapping determined slopes to be greater than 28 degrees are identified in Table 3.1-6.
TABLE 3.1-5
SOILS CROSSED BY
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Soil Series Milepost Erosion
Potential1
Capability
Class2
Drainage Characteristics
Wind
Erodibility
Group3
ChkE 4.78-4.89 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
HncD 4.89-5.09 Moderate –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
ChkE 5.09-5.15 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
HncD 5.15-5.29 Moderate –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
ChkE 5.29-5.35 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
ChkC 5.35-5.38 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
CatbA 5.38-5.65 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
HncD 5.65-5.67 Moderate –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
CatbA 5.67-5.74 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
ChkE 5.74-5.83 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
CatbA 5.83-5.87 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
ChkE 5.87-5.92 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
WATER 5.92-5.96 Not Rated N/A N/A N/A
ChkC 5.96-5.97 Slight 7s Well Drained 8 1 = The erosion potential for each of the soils was determined by reviewing the erosion properties provided by the NRCS’s Soil Data
Mart. The NRCS has evaluated soils based on the slope and on soil erosion factor K. A rating of “slight” indicates that erosion is
unlikely under ordinary climatic conditions. A rating of “moderate” indicates that some erosion is likely and that erosion control
measures may be needed. A rating of “severe” indicates that erosion is very likely and that erosion control measures, including
revegetation of bare areas are advised. A rating of “very severe” indicates that significant erosion is expected, loss of soil
productivity and off-site damage are likely, and erosion control measures are costly and generally impractical.
2 = Capability class refers to the suitability of soils for most kinds of field crops. The soils are grouped according to their limitations
for field crops, the risk of damage if they are used for crops, and the way they respond to management. Soil Capability Subclasses
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-6
July 2010
are designated by adding e, w, or s to the Capability Class designation. The letter “e” shows that the main hazard is the risk of
erosion unless close-growing plant cover is maintained; the letter “s” denotes that the soil is limited mainly because it is shallow,
droughty, or stony’ “w” indicates that water in or on the soil interferes with plant growth or cultivation. Capability Class 1: Soils
have slight limitations that restrict their use. Capability Class 2: Soils have moderate limitations that reduce the choice of plants or
that require moderate conservation practices. Capability Class 3: Soils have severe limitations that reduce the choice of plants or
that require special conservation practices, or both. Capability Class 4: Soils have very severe limitations that reduce the choice of
plants or that require very careful management, or both. Capability Class 5: Soils are not likely to erode but have other limitations,
impractical to remove, that limit their use. Capability Class 6: Sols have severe limitations that make them generally unsuitable
for cultivation. Capability Class 7: Soils have very severe limitations that make them unsuitable for cultivation. Capability Class
8: Soils and miscellaneous areas have limitations that nearly preclude their use for commercial crop production.
3 = The wind erodibility group classification for each of the soils was determined by reviewing the physical soil properties data
provided by the NRCS’s Soil Data Mart. The NRCS has grouped soils that have similar properties affecting their susceptibility to
wind erosion. The soils assigned to group 1 are the most susceptible to wind erosion, and those assigned to group 8 are the least
susceptible.
TABLE 3.1-6
STEEP SLOPES (>28 DEGREES) CROSSED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
HAMBURG MOUNTAIN WILDLIFE MANAGEMENT AREA
Loop ID MP Distance (feet)
325 4.78 – 4.98 8,712
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-7
July 2010
3.1.4 Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area Plant List
TABLE 3.1-7
PROJECT RED OAK/SWEET BIRCH COMMUNITY PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Layer Common Name Scientific Name Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Sweet Birch Betula lenta 2’-3’ 250 - 2,003
MP 4.78 – MP 5.41
MP 5.79 – MP 5.85
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 250 - 2,003
Black Oak Quercus velutina 2’-3’ 250 - 2,003
Sugar Maple Acer saccharum 2’-3’ 150 - 2,003
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 200 - 2,004
Black Cherry Prunus serotina 2’-3’ 200 - 2,004
Total - - 1,210 6 x 6 12,020
Shrub
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 270
Black
Huckleberry
Gaylussacia
baccata 0.5’-1’ 25 - 271
Mountain Laurel Kalmia latifolia 0.5’-1’ 25 - 271
Maple Leaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 271
Total - - 100 20 x 20 1,083
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Red oak-sweet birch forest type may include several associate species including eastern hemlock, white ash, hickory, and American
hornbeam. Eastern hemlock may occur in high percentages in one of the variants of this forest community type.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the
tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol.
95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 12,020 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 1,083, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-8
July 2010
3.2 Waywayanda State Park
3.2.1 Existing Forested Area
On behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment surveyed the portion of Loop 325 within Waywayanda State
Park (“WSP”) from September through December in 2008 to identify wetlands and watercourses. Surveys
continued into 2010 for rare species and community types. Established upland forest types and PFO
systems identified in WSP are identified below. Aerial photographs of the Project area in WSP are included
in Appendix E.
Upland Forest
Oak/Hickory Community
Tree species present in the oak/hickory community type along the ROW in WSP include red oak, white oak
(Quercus alba), pignut hickory (Carya glabra), shagbark hickory (Carya ovata) and hop-hornbeam (Ostrya
virginiana). Shrub species identified in the Project area in WSP included flowering dogwood (Cornus
florida), witch-hazel (Hamamelis virginiana), lowbush blueberry (Vaccinium vacillans) and mapleleaf
viburnum (Viburnum acerifolium).
Chestnut Oak/Scrub Oak Community
The chestnut oak/scrub oak community in WSP included scarlet oak (Quercus coccinea), chestnut oak
(Quercus prinus), white oak, gray birch (Betula populifolia), pitch pine (Pinus rigida), and black cherry
(Prunus serotina). Shrub species included scrub oak (Quercus ilicifolia), lowbush blueberry, black
huckleberry (Gaylussacia baccata) and common juniper (Juniperus communis).
Eastern Hemlock/Oak Community
The Eastern hemlock/oak community in WSP included Eastern hemlock (Tsuga canadensis), red oak, white
ash (Fraxinus americana) and black gum (Nyssa sylvatica). Shrub species included highbush blueberry
(Vaccinium corymbosum), mapleleaf viburnum, witch-hazel, and arrow-wood (Vibernum dentatum).
Palustrine Forested Wetlands
Red Maple/Hemlock/Yellow Birch Community
The red maple/hemlock/yellow birch communities in WSP included red maple (Acer rubrum), yellow birch
(Betula alleghaniensis), black gum, green ash (Fraxinus pensylvanica) and Eastern hemlock. Shrub
species included northern arrow-wood, highbush blueberry, spicebush (Lindera benzoin) and silky dogwood
(Cornus amomum).
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-9
July 2010
TABE 3.2-1
FOREST COMMUNITY TYPES CROSSED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Community Type Mileposts Crossed Total Distance (Miles)
Oak Hickory
MP 9.25 – MP 9.29
0.75 MP 9.41 – MP 9.74
MP 9.93 – MP 10.04
MP 10.06 – MP 10.33
Chestnut Oak/Scrub Oak
MP 11.09 – MP 11.21
0.42 MP 12.28 – MP 12.50
MP 12.68 – MP 12.76
Eastern Hemlock / Oak
MP 9.83 – MP 9.86
0.23 MP 10.48 – MP 10.51
MP 11.00 – MP 11.09
MP 11.21 – MP 11.27
MP 11.32 – MP 11.34
Red Maple/Hemlock Yellow
Birch
MP 9.29 – MP 9.31
0.90 MP 9.74 – MP 9.93
MP 10.04 – MP 10.06
MP 10.33 – MP 11.00
Tennessee will reforest 16.10 of the 20.17 acres deforested on-site within the Project workspace. Table
3.2-2 identifies the acres of existing forest within the Project ROW that will be temporarily and permanently
impacted. Acreage under Additional Temporary Workspace (“ATWS”) and Temporary Workspace (“TWS”)
are proposed for reforestation. Acreage in the permanent column quantifies the acreage of existing forest
that will be maintained in a scrub-shrub state post-construction. The total acres permanently converted to
scrub-shrub will be compensated for in monetary payment (see Appendix C) and through reforestation of
portions of the ROW within WSP not within the ½ acre grids determined to contain 33 percent or more
canopy cover. See Appendix E for a depiction of the Project area overlain with the NJ DEP statewide ½
acre grid system, and grids highlighted as containing existing forested area. Table 5.0-1 includes additional
acreage to be reforested in accordance with this plan, outside the grids determined to contain 33 percent or
more forest cover.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-10
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-2
IMPACTS TO DEFORESTED AREAS
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Forest Type Acres Deforested
ATWS TWS Perma
Total
Chestnut Oak /
Scrub Oak 1.75 2.16 0.58 4.49
Eastern Hemlock /
Oak Community 1.80 2.70 1.26 5.76
Oak / Hickory 2.92 4.30 1.86 9.08
Red Maple /
Eastern Hemlock /
Yellow Birch
0.00 0.47 0.37 0.84
Total 6.47 9.63 4.07 20.17
a: Includes impacts associated with new permanent easement.
3.2.2 Suitability for Planting
The USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007), NRCS Soil Data Mart (2010) and field surveys were used to
assess the suitability of the deforested area for replanting. Areas of shallow depth to bedrock have been
identified within the Project area in WSP through field surveys conducted by AECOM Environment and
review of the USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007).
Review of the NRCS soil data mart provided suitability ratings for planting on soil types found within the
Project area. Ratings are based on slope, depth to a restrictive layer, content of sand, plasticity index, rock
fragments on or below the surface, depth to a water table, and ponding. From review of this data, the main
limitation to planting in the Project area identified was the presence of rock fragments. Areas with a high
rock fragment content and/or shallow depth to bedrock create unfavorable conditions for replanting larger
sized plants and can result in poor survival rates. These areas are present on mountainous terrain on steep
slopes and along ridgelines. As a result, seedlings are the preferred product type for re-planting in areas
identified as moderate or poorly suited for hand planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-11
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
AhcBc 9.25-9.27
Alden, gneiss
till substratum,
extremely
stony
90
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
RokD 9.27-9.59
Rockaway, thin
fragipan 45
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Chatfield 25
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Rock Outcrop 20 Not Rated Not Rated
CatbA
9.59-9.78
10.32-10.37
10.40-10.72
Catden 85
Moderately
suited
(sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(sandiness)
HhmBc
9.78-9.83
9.83-9.97
10.17-10.18
Hibernia,
extremely
stony
80
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments
RokC 9.97-10.17
Rockaway, thin
fragipan 45
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Chatfield 40
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
Rock Outcrop 15 Not Rated Not Rated
RkgBc 10.18-10.21
10.24-10.32
Ridgebury,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
RomC 10.21-10.24
10.87-10.95
Rockaway,
moderately
well drained,
extremely
stony
70
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
Rock Outcrop 30
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(restrictive
layer, slope,
sandiness)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-12
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
RkrB 10.37-10.40
11.16-11.34 Riverhead 85 Well suited
Moderately
suited (slope)
HhmCc 10.72-10.78
Hibernia,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
RNRE 10.78-10.87
10.95-11.06
Rock Outcrop 60
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Poorly suited
(slope,
restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Rockaway,
moderately
well drained,
extremely
stony
40
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
RkrC 11.06-11.12 Riverhead 85 Well suited Moderately
suited (slope)
SwhC 12.28 – 12.48
12.59 – 12.79
Smartswood,
very stony 60 Well suited
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments,
slope)
Rock Outcrop 40
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(restrictive
layer, slope,
sandiness)
RNTE 12.48 – 12.59
Rock Outcrop 60
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(restrictive
layer, slope,
sandiness)
Smartwood,
very stony 40 Well suited
Unsuited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-13
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-4
SHALLOW DEPTH TO BEDROCK AREAS
FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Mileposts with
Shallow Depth to
Bedrock
Linear Distance Crossed
(miles)
9.25 – 9.59 0.34
9.97 – 10.17 0.20
10.21 – 10.24 0.03
10.72 – 11.06 0.34
12.20 – 12.79 0.51
Total miles 1.42
a: Areas of shallow bedrock are those with bedrock within five feet from the surface.
b: Source: USDA 2007
3.2.3 Soils and Topography
Soil types crossed by Loop 325 in WSP were identified using the NRCS‟s Soil Data Mart and Web Soil
Survey information for the Sussex and Passaic County Soil Survey Areas available on-line (NRCS 2008a &
b) are listed in Table 3.2-5. Topography along Loop 325 in the WSP ranges from approximately 1,160 to
1,340 feet above sea level. Soil types that have moderate to severe erosion potential due to slope are
identified in Table 3.2-5. Areas along Loop 325 within WSP where ground surveys and review of USGS
topographic mapping determined slopes to be greater than 28 degrees are identified in Table 3.2-6.
TABLE 3.2-5
SOILS CROSSED BY
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Soil Series Milepost Erosion
Potential1
Capability
Class2
Drainage Characteristics
Wind
Erodibility
Group3
AhcBc 9.25-9.27 Slight 7s Very Poorly Drained 8
RokD 9.27-9.59 Moderate –
Slope 7s Well Drained 5
CatbA 9.59-9.78 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
HhmBc 9.78-9.83 Slight 7s Somewhat Poorly Drained 6
HhmBc 9.83-9.97 Slight 7s Somewhat Poorly Drained 6
RokC 9.97-10.17 Slight 6s Well Drained 6
HhmBc 10.17-10.18 Slight 7s Somewhat Poorly Drained 6
RkgBc 10.18-10.21 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
RomC 10.21-10.24 Slight 7s Moderately Well Drained 8
RkgBc 10.24-10.32 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-14
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-5
SOILS CROSSED BY
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
WAYWAYANDA STATE PARK
Soil Series Milepost Erosion
Potential1
Capability
Class2
Drainage Characteristics
Wind
Erodibility
Group3
CatbA 10.32-10.37 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
RkrB 10.37-10.40 Slight 2e Well Drained 3
CatbA 10.40-10.72 Slight 5w Very Poorly Drained 8
HhmCc 10.72-10.78 Slight 7s Somewhat Poorly Drained 8
RNRE 10.78-10.87 Moderate –
Slope 7s Moderately Well Drained N/A
RomC 10.87-10.95 Slight 7s Moderately Well Drained 8
RNRE 10.95-11.06 Moderate –
Slope 7s Moderately Well Drained N/A
RkrC 11.06-11.12 Slight 3e Well Drained 3
WATER 11.12-11.16 Not Rated N/A N/A N/A
RkrB 11.16-11.34 Slight 2e Well Drained 3
SwhC 12.28 – 12.48 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
RNTE 12.48 – 12.59 Severe –
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
SwhC 12.59 – 12.79 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
1 – 3: See footnotes of Table 3.1-5 for classification descriptions.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-15
July 2010
3.2.4 Waywayanda State Park Plant List
TABLE 3.2-6
PROJECT OAK/HICKORY COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common Name Scientific Name Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 300 - 2,016
MP 9.25 – MP 9.29
MP 9.41 – MP 9.74
MP 9.93 – MP 10.04
MP 10.06 – MP 10.33
White Oak Quercus alba 2’-3’ 250 - 2,016
Pignut Hickory Carya glabra 2’-3’ 250 - 2,016
Shagbark
Hickory Carya ovata 2’-3’ 300 - 2,016
Hop-hornbeam Ostrya virginiana 2’-3’ 200 - 2,016
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 10,080
Shrub
Flowering
Dogwood Cornus florida 0.5’-1’ 25 - 227
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 227
Lowbush
Blueberry Vaccinium vacillans 0.5’-1’ 25 - 227
Mapleleaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 227
Total - - 100 20 x 20 908
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
The oak-hickory forest type generally occurs on submesic sites throughout the NJ Highlands.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the tables
included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol. 95, No.
3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage Program,
Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 10,080 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 908, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-16
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-7
PROJECT CHESTNUT OAK/SCRUB OAK COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Layer Common Name Scientific Name Size /
whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Scarlet oak Quercus coccinea 2’-3’ 250 - 910
MP 11.09 – MP 11.21
MP 12.28 – MP 12.50
MP 12.68 – MP 12.76
Chestnut Oak Quercus prinus 2’-3’ 250 - 910
White Oak Quercus alba 2’-3’ 250 - 910
Gray Birch Betula populifolia 2’-3’ 150 - 910
Pitch Pine Pinus rigida 2’-3’ 200 - 910
Black Cherry Prunus serotina 2’-3’ 200 - 909
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 5,459
Shrub
Scrub Oak Quercus ilicifolia 0.5’-1’ 25 - 123
Lowbush
Blueberry Vaccinium vacillans 0.5’-1’ 25 - 123
Black
Huckleberry Gaylussacia baccata 0.5’-1’ 25 - 123
Common Juniper Juniperus communis 0.5’-1’ 25 - 123
Total - - 100 20 x 20 492
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Chestnut oak forest community is generally found on exposed ridges with a variety of understory shrubs including scrub oak, black huckleberry,
mountain laurel, sheep-laurel, and blueberry in the shrub layer.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the tables
included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol. 95, No.
3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 5,459 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 492; however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-17
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-8
PROJECT EASTERN HEMLOCK/OAK COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 400 - 1,570
MP 11.00 – MP
11.09
MP 11.21 – MP
11.27
MP 11.32 – MP
11.34
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 300 - 1,571
White Ash Fraxinus americana 2’-3’ 350 - 1,571
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 250 - 1,571
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 6,283
Shrub
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 141
Mapleleaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 141
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 142
Arrow-wood Viburnum dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 142
Total - - 100 20 x 20 566
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
The eastern hemlock community occurs primarily on steeper slopes at lower elevations and in ravines on shallow more acidic soils.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in
developing the tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club,
Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural
Heritage Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative
Extension, Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 6,283 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 566, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-18
July 2010
TABLE 3.2-9
PROJECT RED MAPLE/HEMLOCK/YELLOW BIRCH COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Red Maple Acer rubrum 2’-3’ 300 - 481
MP 9.29 – MP 9.31
MP 9.74 – MP 9.93
MP 10.04 – MP 10.06
MP 10.33 – MP 11.00
Yellow Birch Betula
alleghaniensis 2’-3’ 300 - 481
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 300 - 480
Green Ash Fraxinus
pensylvanica 2’-3’ 200 - 480
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 200 - 480
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 2,402
Shrub
Northern
Arrow-wood Viburnum dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 54
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 54
Spicebush Lindera benzoin 0.5’-1’ 25 - 54
Silky
Dogwood Cornus amomum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 55
Total - - 100 20 x 20 217
Herb
New England Wet Mix from
New England Wetland Plants, Inc.
and/or
Northeast Wetland Diversity Mix
from Southern Tier Consulting
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Red maple/hemlock/yellow birch community type occasionally had higher percentages of eastern hemlock with black gum (Nyssa sylvatica)
or black spruce (Picea mariana) occurring as an associate species.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the
tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol.
95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension,
Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 2,402 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 217, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-19
July 2010
3.3 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area
3.3.1 Existing Forested Area
Upland Forest
On behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment surveyed the portion of Loop 325 within Bearfort Mountain
Natural Area (“BMNA”) from September through December in 2008 to identify wetlands and watercourses.
Surveys continued into 2010 for rare species and community types. Existing upland forest crossed by Loop
325 within BMNA consist of the chestnut oak / scrub oak, Eastern hemlock / oak and red maple / hemlock /
yellow birch community types. Typical species present in the ROW within BMNA in each of these
communities are identified in the above section.
Palustrine Forested Wetlands
Existing PFO systems crossed by Loop 325 within BMNA consisted of the red maple / hemlock/ yellow birch
community type. A description of the red maple / hemlock / yellow birch community type is provided above.
TABLE 3.3-1
FOREST COMMUNITY TYPES CROSSED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Community Type Mileposts Crossed Total Distance (Miles)
Chestnut Oak / Scrub Oak
MP 11.69 – MP 11.84
0.41 MP 11.85 – MP 11.90
MP 11.95 – MP 12.05
MP 12.17 – MP 12.28
Eastern Hemlock / Oak
MP 11.34 – MP 11.46
0.52 MP 11.50 – MP 11.69
MP 12.50 – MP 12.68
MP 12.76 – MP 12.79
Red Maple / Hemlock / Yellow
Birch
MP 11.46 – MP 11.50
0.15
MP 11.84 – MP 11.85
MP 11.90 – MP 11.95
MP 12.08 – MP 12.11
MP 12.15 – MP 12.17
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-20
July 2010
Tennessee will reforest 5.68 of the 7.18 acres deforested on-site within the Project workspace. Table 3.3-2
identifies the acres of existing forest within the Project ROW that will be temporarily and permanently
impacted. Acreage under Additional Temporary Workspace (“ATWS”) and Temporary Workspace (“TWS”)
are proposed for reforestation. Acreage in the permanent column quantifies the acreage of existing forest
that will be maintained in a scrub-shrub state post-construction. The total acres permanently converted to
scrub-shrub will be compensated for in monetary payment (see Appendix C) and through reforestation of
portions of the ROW within BMNA not within the ½ acre grids determined to contain 33 percent or more
canopy cover. See Appendix E for a depiction of the Project area overlain with the NJ DEP statewide ½
acre grid system, and grids highlighted as containing existing forested area. Table 5.0-1 includes additional
acreage to be reforested in accordance with this plan, outside the grids determined to contain 33 percent or
more forest cover.
TABLE 3.3-2
IMPACTS TO DEFORESTED AREAS
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Forest Type Acres Deforested
ATWS TWS Perma
Total
Chestnut Oak /
Scrub Oak 0.40 1.50 0.66 2.56
Eastern Hemlock /
Oak 1.72 1.74 0.74 4.20
Red Maple /
Eastern Hemlock /
Yellow Birch
0.00 0.32 0.10 0.42
Total 2.12 3.56 1.50 7.18
a: Includes impacts associated with new permanent easement.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-21
July 2010
3.3.2 Suitability for Planting
The USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007), NRCS Soil Data Mart (2010) and field surveys were used to
assess the suitability of the deforested area for replanting. Areas of shallow depth to bedrock have been
identified within the Project area in BMNA through field surveys conducted by AECOM Environment and
review of the USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007).
Review of the NRCS soil data mart provided suitability ratings for planting on soil types found within the
Project area. Ratings are based on slope, depth to a restrictive layer, content of sand, plasticity index, rock
fragments on or below the surface, depth to a water table, and ponding. From review of this data, the main
limitation to planting in the Project area identified was the presence of rock fragments. Areas with a high
rock fragment content and/or shallow depth to bedrock create unfavorable conditions for replanting larger
sized plants and can result in poor survival rates. These areas are present on mountainous terrain on steep
slopes and along ridgelines. As a result, seedlings are the preferred product type for re-planting in areas
identified as moderate or poorly suited for hand planting.
TABLE 3.3-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
RkrB 11.34-11.35 Riverhead 85 Well Suited Moderately
suited (slope)
SwhC
11.35-11.39
11.48-11.53
11.54-11.71
11.79-11.90
11.93-12.13
12.25-12.28
Smartswood,
very stony 60 Well suited
Unsuited
(slope, rock
fragments)
Rock Outcrop 40
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(restrictive
layer, slope,
sandiness)
RNTE 11.39-11.48
12.13-12.25
Rock Outcrop 60
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness,
slope)
Smartswood,
very stony 40 Well suited
Unsuited
(slope, rock
fragments)
NowBc
11.53-11.54
11.78-11.79
11.90-11.93
Norwich,
poorly drained,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-22
July 2010
TABLE 3.3-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
CarAt 11.71-11.78
Carlisle,
frequently
flooded
85 Well suited Well suited
TABLE 3.3-4
SHALLOW DEPTH TO BEDROCK AREAS FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Mileposts with
Shallow Depth to
Bedrock
Linear Distance Crossed (Miles)
11.35 – 11.53 0.18
11.54 – 11.71 0.17
11.79 – 11.90 0.11
11.93 – 12.28 0.35
Total Miles 0.81
a: Areas of shallow bedrock are those with bedrock
within five feet from the surface.
b: Source: USDA 2007
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-23
July 2010
3.3.3 Soils and Topography
Soil types crossed by Loop 325 in BMNA were identified using the NRCS Soil Data Mart and Web Soil
Survey information for the Sussex and Passaic County Soil Survey Areas available on-line (NRCS 2008a &
b) and are listed in Table 3.3-5. Topography along Loop 325 in the BMNA ranges from approximately 1,000
to 1,400 feet above sea level. Soil types that have moderate to severe erosion potential due to slope are
identified in Table 3.3-5. Areas along Loop 325 within BMNA where ground surveys and review of USGS
topographic mapping determined slopes to be greater than 28 degrees are identified in Table 3.3-6.
TABLE 3.3-5
SOILS CROSSED BY
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
BEARFORT MOUNTAIN NATURAL AREA
Soil Series Milepost Erosion
Potential1
Capability
Class2
Drainage Characteristics
Wind
Erodibility
Group3
RkrB 11.34-11.35 Slight 2e Well Drained 3
SwhC 11.35-11.39 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
RNTE 11.39-11.48 Severe -
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
SwhC 11.48-11.53 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
NowBc 11.53-11.54 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
SwhC 11.54-11.71 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
CarAt 11.71-11.78 Slight 3w Very Poorly Drained 2
NowBc 11.78-11.79 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
SwhC 11.79-11.90 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
NowBc 11.90-11.93 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
SwhC 11.93-12.13 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
RNTE 12.13-12.25 Severe -
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
SwhC 12.25-12.28 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
1 - 3: See footnotes of Table 3.1-5 for classification descriptions.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-24
July 2010
3.3.4 Bearfort Mountain Natural Area Plan List
TABLE 3.3-6
PROJECT CHESTNUT OAK/SCRUB OAK COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Layer Common Name Scientific Name Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Scarlet oak Quercus coccinea 2’-3’ 250 - 443
MP 11.69 – MP 11.84
MP 11.85 – MP 11.90
MP 11.95 – MP 12.05
MP 12.17 – MP 12.28
Chestnut Oak Quercus prinus 2’-3’ 250 - 442
White Oak Quercus alba 2’-3’ 250 - 442
Gray Birch Betula populifolia 2’-3’ 150 - 442
Pitch Pine Pinus rigida 2’-3’ 200 - 442
Black Cherry Prunus serotina 2’-3’ 200 - 442
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 2,653
Shrub
Scrub Oak Quercus ilicifolia 0.5’-1’ 25 - 60
Lowbush
Blueberry Vaccinium vacillans 0.5’-1’ 25 - 60
Black
Huckleberry
Gaylussacia
baccata 0.5’-1’ 25 - 60
Common Juniper Juniperus communis 0.5’-1’ 25 - 59
Total - - 100 20 x 20 239
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Chestnut oak forest community is generally found on exposed ridges with a variety of understory shrubs including scrub oak, black huckleberry,
mountain laurel, sheep-laurel, and blueberry in the shrub layer.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the tables
included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol. 95, No.
3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage Program,
Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 2,653 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 239, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-25
July 2010
TABLE 3.3-7
PROJECT EASTERN HEMLOCK/OAK COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa
Mile Post
Locations
Tree
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 400 - 1,207
MP 11.34 – MP
11.46
MP 11.50 – MP
11.69
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 300 - 1,207
White Ash Fraxinus
americana 2’-3’ 350 - 1,208
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 250 - 1,208
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 4,830
Shrub
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 108
Mapleleaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 109
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 109
Arrow-wood Viburnum
dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 109
Total - - 100 20 x 20 435
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
The eastern hemlock community occurs primarily on steeper slopes at lower elevations and in ravines on shallow more acidic
soils.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in
developing the tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical
Club, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural
Heritage Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative
Extension, Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 4,830 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 435, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-26
July 2010
TABLE 3.3-8
PROJECT RED MAPLE/HEMLOCK/YELLOW BIRCH COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Red Maple Acer rubrum 2’-3’ 300 - 90
MP 11.46 – MP 11.50
MP 11.84 – MP 11.85
MP 11.90 – MP 11.95
MP 12.08 – MP 12.11
MP 12.15 – MP12.17
Yellow Birch Betula
alleghaniensis 2’-3’ 300 - 90
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 300 - 89
Green Ash Fraxinus
pensylvanica 2’-3’ 200 - 89
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 200 - 89
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 447
Shrub
Northern
Arrow-wood Viburnum dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 11
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 10
Spicebush Lindera benzoin 0.5’-1’ 25 - 10
Silky
Dogwood Cornus amomum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 10
Total - - 100 20 x 20 41
Herb
New England Wet Mix from
New England Wetland Plants, Inc.
and/or
Northeast Wetland Diversity Mix
from Southern Tier Consulting
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Red maple/hemlock/yellow birch community type occasionally had higher percentages of eastern hemlock with black gum (Nyssa sylvatica)
or black spruce (Picea mariana) occurring as an associate species.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the
tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol.
95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension,
Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 447 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 41, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-27
July 2010
3.4 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park
3.4.1 Existing Forested Area
Upland Forest
On behalf of Tennessee, AECOM Environment surveyed the portion of Loop 325 within Long Pond
Ironworks / Ringwood State Park (“RSP”) from September through December in 2008 to identify wetlands
and watercourses. Surveys continued into 2010 for rare species and community types. Existing upland
forest crossed by Loop 325 within RSP consist of the red oak / sweet birch, oak / hickory, Eastern hemlock /
oak and red maple / hemlock / yellow birch community types. Typical species present in the ROW within
RSP in each of these communities are identified in the above sections.
Palustrine Forested Wetlands
Existing PFO systems crossed by Loop 325 within RSP consisted of the red maple / hemlock/ yellow birch
community type. A description of the red maple / hemlock / yellow birch community type is provided above.
TABLE 3.4-1
FOREST COMMUNITY TYPES CROSSED BY THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Community Type Mileposts Crossed Total Distance (Miles)
Red Oak / Sweet Birch MP 15.85 – MP 15.95 0.10
Oak / Hickory MP 15.02 – MP 15.07
0.11 MP 15.41 – MP 15.47
Eastern Hemlock / Oak
MP 14.76 – MP 15.02
0.48 MP 15.17 – MP 15.22
MP 15.24 – MP 15.41
Red Maple / Hemlock / Yellow
Birch
MP 15.07 – MP 15.17 0.12
MP 15.22 – MP 15.24
Tennessee will reforest 5.94 of the 8.06 acres deforested on-site within the Project workspace. Table 3.4-2
identifies the acres of existing forest within the Project ROW that will be temporarily and permanently
impacted. Acreage under Additional Temporary Workspace (“ATWS”) and Temporary Workspace (“TWS”)
are proposed for reforestation. Acreage in the permanent column quantifies the acreage of existing forest
that will be maintained in a scrub-shrub state post-construction. The total acres permanently converted to
scrub-shrub will be compensated for in monetary payment (see Appendix C) and through reforestation of
portions of the ROW within RSP not within the ½ acre grids determined to contain 33 percent or more
canopy cover. See Appendix E for a depiction of the Project area overlain with the NJ DEP statewide ½
acre grid system, and grids highlighted as containing existing forested area. Table 5.0-1 includes additional
acreage to be reforested in accordance with this plan, outside the grids determined to contain 33 percent or
more forest cover.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-28
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-2
IMPACTS TO DEFORESTED AREAS
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Forest Type Acres Deforested
ATWS TWS Perma
Total
Red Oak / Sweet
Birch 0.55 0.63 0.38 1.56
Oak / Hickory 0.02 0.63 0.47 1.12
Eastern Hemlock /
Oak 1.32 2.42 1.02 4.76
Red Maple /
Hemlock / Yellow
Birch
0.00 0.37 0.25 0.62
Total 1.89 4.05 2.12 8.06
a: Includes impacts associated with new permanent easement.
3.4.2 Suitability for Planting
The USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007), NRCS Soil Data Mart (2010) and field surveys were used to
assess the suitability of the deforested area for replanting. Areas of shallow depth to bedrock have been
identified within the Project area in RSP through field surveys conducted by AECOM Environment and
review of the USDA Web Soil Survey (USDA 2007).
Review of the NRCS soil data mart provided suitability ratings for planting on soil types found within the
Project area. Ratings are based on slope, depth to a restrictive layer, content of sand, plasticity index, rock
fragments on or below the surface, depth to a water table, and ponding. From review of this data, the main
limitation to planting in the Project area identified was the presence of rock fragments. Areas with a high
rock fragment content and/or shallow depth to bedrock create unfavorable conditions for replanting larger
sized plants and can result in poor survival rates. These areas are present on mountainous terrain on steep
slopes and along ridgelines. As a result, seedlings are the preferred product type for re-planting in areas
identified as moderate or poorly suited for hand planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-29
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
SweCc 14.76-14.80
Smartswood,
extremely
stony
90
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
SweDc 14.80-14.84
Smartswood,
extremely
stony
90
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
NowBc 14.84-15.07
Norwich,
poorly drained,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments)
RNRE 15.07-15.15
15.28-15.34
Rock Outcrop 60
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Poorly suited
(slope,
restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Rockaway,
moderately
well drained,
extremely
stony
40
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(slope, rock
fragments)
RomC 15.15-15.28
Rockaway,
moderately
well drained,
extremely
stony
70
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope
Rock Outcrop 30
Unsuited
(restrictive
layer,
sandiness)
Moderately
suited
(restrictive
layer, slope,
sandiness)
RobCc 15.34-15.41
Rockaway,
moderately
well drained,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-30
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-3
SUITABILITY FOR PLANTING
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Map Symbol Mileposts Soil Name Percent of
Map Unit
Suitability for
Hand Planting
Suitability for
mechanical
planting
PHG 15.41-15.47 Pits, sand and
gravel 100 Not Rated Not Rated
RobDc 15.85-15.92
Rockaway,
extremely
stony
85
Moderately
suited (rock
fragments)
Poorly suited
(rock
fragments,
slope)
TABLE 3.4-4
SHALLOW DEPTH TO BEDROCK AREAS FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Mileposts with
Shallow Depth to
Bedrock
Linear Distance Crossed (miles)
14.76 – 14.84 0.08
15.07 – 15.34 0.27
Total miles 0.35
a: Areas of shallow bedrock are those with bedrock within five feet from the surface.
b: Source: USDA 2007
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-31
July 2010
3.4.3 Soils and Topography
Soil types crossed by Loop 325 in RSP were identified using the NRCS Soil Data Mart and Web Soil Survey
information for the Sussex and Passaic County Soil Survey Areas available on-line (NRCS 2008a & b) and
are listed in Table 3.4-5. Topography along Loop 325 in the RSP ranges from approximately 480 to 660
feet above sea level. Soil types that have moderate to severe erosion potential due to slope are identified in
Table 3.4-5. Areas along Loop 325 within RSP where ground surveys and review of USGS topographic
mapping determined slopes to be greater than 28 degrees are identified in Table 3.4-6.
TABLE 3.4-5
SOILS CROSSED BY
THE 300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
LONG POND IRONWORKS / RINGWOOD STATE PARK
Soil Series Milepost Erosion
Potential1
Capability
Class2
Drainage Characteristics
Wind
Erodibility
Group3
SweCc 14.76-14.80 Slight 7s Well Drained 8
SweDc 14.80-14.84 Moderate -
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
NowBc 14.84-15.07 Slight 7s Poorly Drained 8
RNRE 15.07-15.15 Moderate -
Slope 7s Moderately Well Drained N/A
RomC 15.15-15.28 Slight 7s Moderately Well Drained 8
RNRE 15.28-15.34 Moderate -
Slope 7s Moderately Well Drained N/A
RobCc 15.34-15.41 Slight 7s Moderately Well Drained 8
PHG 15.41-15.47 Not Rated misc. misc. 8
RobDc 15.85-15.92 Moderate -
Slope 7s Well Drained 8
WATER 15.92-15.96 Not Rated Not Rated Not Rated N/A
1 - 3: See footnotes of Table 3.1-5 for classification descriptions.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-32
July 2010
3.4.4 Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park Plan List
TABLE 3.4-6
PROJECT RED OAK/SWEET BIRCH COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Layer Common Name Scientific Name Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Sweet Birch Betula lenta 2’-3’ 250 - 274
MP 15.85 – MP 15.95
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 250 - 274
Black Oak Quercus velutina 2’-3’ 250 - 275
Sugar Maple Acer saccharum 2’-3’ 150 - 275
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 200 - 275
Black Cherry Prunus serotina 2’-3’ 200 - 275
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 1648
Shrub
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 37
Black
Huckleberry
Gaylussacia
baccata 0.5’-1’ 25 - 37
Mountain Laurel Kalmia latifolia 0.5’-1’ 25 - 37
Maple Leaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 37
Total - - 100 20 x 20 148
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Red oak-sweet birch forest type may include several associate species including eastern hemlock, white ash, hickory, and American hornbeam.
Eastern hemlock may occur in high percentages in one of the variants of this forest community type.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the
tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol. 95,
No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 1648 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 148, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-33
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-7
PROJECT OAK/HICKORY COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common Name Scientific Name Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 300 - 182
MP 15.02 – MP 15.07
MP 15.41 – MP 15.47
White Oak Quercus alba 2’-3’ 250 - 182
Pignut Hickory Carya glabra 2’-3’ 250 - 182
Shagbark
Hickory Carya ovata 2’-3’ 300 - 181
Hop-hornbeam Ostrya virginiana 2’-3’ 200 - 181
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 908
Shrub
Flowering
Dogwood Cornus florida 0.5’-1’ 25 - 21
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 21
Lowbush
Blueberry Vaccinium vacillans 0.5’-1’ 25 - 20
Mapleleaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 20
Total - - 100 20 x 20 82
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
The oak-hickory forest type generally occurs on submesic sites throughout the NJ Highlands.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the tables
included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol. 95,
No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension, Cook
College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 908 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 82, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3-34
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-8
PROJECT EASTERN HEMLOCK/OAK COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 400 - 1,305
MP 14.76 – MP
15.02
MP 15.17 – MP
15.22
MP 15.24 – MP
15.41
Red Oak Quercus rubra 2’-3’ 300 - 1,305
White Ash Fraxinus
americana 2’-3’ 350 - 1,306
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 250 - 1,306
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 5,222
Shrub
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 117
Mapleleaf
Viburnum
Viburnum
acerifolium 0.5’-1’ 25 - 117
Witch-hazel Hamamelis
virginiana 0.5’-1’ 25 - 118
Arrow-wood Viburnum dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 118
Total - - 100 20 x 20 470
Herb
Native Upland Wildlife Forage and
Cover Mix
(Ernst Seed Company) and/or
Northeast Upland Wildlife Seed Mix
(Southern Tier Consulting)
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
The eastern hemlock community occurs primarily on steeper slopes at lower elevations and in ravines on shallow more acidic soils.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in
developing the tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical
Club, Vol. 95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural
Heritage Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative
Extension, Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 5,222 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 470, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
4-35
July 2010
TABLE 3.4-9
PROJECT RED MAPLE/HEMLOCK/YELLOW BIRCH COMMUNITY* PLANT LIST FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
Common
Name Scientific Name
Size /
Whips
Quantity Per
Acre**
Approximate
Spacing (feet)
Number of
Individualsa Mile Post Locations
Tree
Red Maple Acer rubrum 2’-3’ 300 - 104
MP 15.07 – MP 15.17
MP 15.22 – MP 15.24
Yellow Birch Betula
alleghaniensis 2’-3’ 300 - 104
Black Gum Nyssa sylvatica 2’-3’ 300 - 103
Green Ash Fraxinus
pensylvanica 2’-3’ 200 - 103
Eastern
Hemlock Tsuga canadensis 2’-3’ 200 - 103
Total - - 1210 6 x 6 517
Shrub
Northern
Arrow-wood Viburnum dentatum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 12
Highbush
Blueberry
Vaccinium
corymbosum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 12
Spicebush Lindera benzoin 0.5’-1’ 25 - 12
Silky
Dogwood Cornus amomum 0.5’-1’ 25 - 11
Total - - 100 20 x 20 47
Herb
New England Wet Mix from
New England Wetland Plants, Inc.
and/or
Northeast Wetland Diversity Mix
from Southern Tier Consulting
N/A Application rates will follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for the individual seed mix
Red maple/hemlock/yellow birch community type occasionally had higher percentages of eastern hemlock with black gum (Nyssa sylvatica)
or black spruce (Picea mariana) occurring as an associate species.
*Tables were developed based on the field surveys and information in several pertinent references. References consulted in developing the
tables included:
Hough, Mary y. 1983. New Jersey Wild Plants. Harmony Press, Harmony, NJ.
Ohmann, Lewis F., and Murray F. Buell. 1968. Forest Vegetation of the New Jersey Highlands. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club, Vol.
95, No. 3, pp. 287-298.
New York Natural Heritage Program. 2010. Appalachian Oak-Hickory Forest. NYNHP Conservation Guide, New York Natural Heritage
Program, Albany, NY.
**Quantity per acre based on the reference: Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey , Cooperative Extension,
Cook College, Rutgers University (M. Vodak undated)
a: The number of each species planted will be as evenly divided as possible to provide a uniform mix of species within the replanted area. The total number of individual trees planted will equal 517 and the total number of individual shrubs planted will equal 47, however the number of each species planted will depend on available stock at the time of planting.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
4-36
July 2010
4.0 Tree Maintenance Schedule
4.1 Scope of Work
Maintenance procedures will be carried out to promote the establishment of the trees and ensure that they
are in a healthy and viable condition the first three growing seasons after construction. Maintenance work
shall include the following:
Inspections
Watering
Mulching
Weeding
Securing stakes and guys
Resetting trees to plumb
Insect and disease control
Fertilization
Pruning
4.2 Inspections
Inspections shall consist of regular visits to the planting sites by a qualified professional to determine the
health and needs of the trees. Inspection times and dates will be the responsibility of Tennessee but a
minimum of four inspections shall be done during the year, with one scheduled during each of the months of
April, May, June and November.
4.3 Watering
Watering is the most crucial maintenance procedure to ensure plant establishment and survivability. When
seasonal rainfall is inadequate to provide sufficient soil moisture for good tree establishment, watering shall
be done. A thorough watering every five to seven days shall be considered ample when rainfall is
insufficient to maintain moisture content. Water would be trucked in from outside sources and should not be
applied faster than the ground can absorb it. Supplemental watering would be applied only as absolutely
necessary for survival of plants to minimize traffic and associated soil disturbance along the ROW.
Watering will be concentrated on re-planted areas near public access roads.
4.4 Mulching
Shredded hardwood mulch shall be the preferred type of mulch but other organic mulches may be used if
approved by supervising botanist. The mulch supplied by the landscape contractor shall be free of debris
and shall be maintained by the landscape contractor around all plantings to a depth of three inches as
shown in the planting diagram (See Appendix G) for the entire maintenance period. Care shall be exercised
to keep mulch two inches away from the base of all plantings. A mulch ring shall be maintained at a size of
36 inches in diameter.
4.5 Weeding
Tall growing weeds that can hinder the establishment of whips and seedlings shall be controlled in a large
enough area around the plant to ensure competition from the weeds does not adversely affect the trees‟
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
4-37
July 2010
survival. Any pre-emergent or post emergent weed control application shall be applied in a manner
consistent with the label and only target the undesirable plants.
4.6 Securing Stakes and Guys
Stakes and guys will be used to support bagged and burlapped individuals. Tree stakes and supporting
materials shall be maintained according to the planting specifications or replaced as necessary during the
first maintenance year. For details on proper staking, see the planting diagram (AppendixG). All staking
materials and guys shall be removed and disposed of by Tennessee at the end of the first year unless
otherwise directed by NJ DEP.
4.7 Resetting Trees to Plumb
Any tree (bagged and burlapped individuals) that deviates from a vertical position shall be adjusted so that
the main trunk is plumb in two directions that are ninety degrees from each other. All care shall be taken not
to harm the root ball or root system of the tree during resetting operations.
4.8 Insect and Disease Control
Trees shall be kept free of insect or disease infestations that can affect their health or establishment.
Integrated pest management techniques shall be employed by Tennessee to minimize or alleviate the
undesirable condition. If the timing is incorrect to administer a control, Tennessee shall monitor the insect or
disease the next season and apply the appropriate controls at that time, if necessary. All insect or disease
problems are to be diagnosed and treated individually. No broadcast spraying of pesticides shall be done.
4.9 Protection Against Deer Browse
Deer browse has been identified as a concern in regards to reforestation success in Project planning.
Where areas adjacent to reforestation plantings show signs of heavy deer browse, the following methods
may be implemented to prevent damage to the reforested areas:
Installation of polypropylene fencing. Fencing will be approximately 7.5 feet tall and attached with
hog ring staples to a high-tension wire. The bottom of the fencing will either be staked to the
ground or attached to another high-tension wire to prevent deer from traveling underneath the
fence. The tension wire will be strung from eight inch posts or from existing trees.
Placement of bud caps. Index cards, envelopes, waterproof paper, etc. or commercial bud caps will
be placed on terminal buds during the dormant season.
Repellents. Repellents would be used as commercially available per product instructions and upon
approval of the NJ DEP.
Replacement of damaged trees with species rated as deer resistant. Substitute tree species will be
chosen as compatible with the applicable forest community type and upon approval from the NJ
DEP.
4.10 Fertilization
A balanced, slow release fertilizer shall be applied at the recommended rate at the end of the first growing
season in late fall. The fertilizer shall be formulated for trees and approved by NJ DEP prior to application.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
4-38
July 2010
The application may be made either by soil injection along the outside of the mulch ring or by applying
granular form to the mulch ring areas. Lime fertilizer will be applied during workspace restoration. Fertilizer
will not be applied within wetlands or watercourses.
4.11 Pruning
Pruning shall be done only to dead, broken, diseased or infested branches during the maintenance period
and according to the New Jersey Board of Tree Expert‟s Pruning Standards for Shade Trees.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
5-39
July 2010
5.0 Summary
Tennessee has developed this reforestation plan under the No Net Loss Reforestation Guidelines.
Tennessee has minimized the amount of existing forest to be cleared to the maximum extent possible
through Project planning. Areas of TWS and ATWS consisting of existing established forest will be
reforested in accordance with this plan. Areas of existing established forest that will be maintained as
permanent easement, and thus cannot be reforested are quantified in Table 5.0-1. In this plan, Tennessee
proposes to compensate for permanent loss of forested area through monetary contribution and through off-
site reforestation. Off-site reforestation will be conducted within portions of the ROW where forest will be
cleared within the NJ DEP ½ acre grid system that were not determined to have 33 percent or more canopy
coverage. Through reforestation of established forest, off-site reforestation and monetary compensation,
Tennessee will comply with the New Jersey No Net Loss Reforestation Act (P.L. 1993, c. 106; C.13:1L-
14.2).
TABLE 5.0-1
NO NET LOSS REFORESTATION PLAN SUMMARY
300 LINE PROJECT – LOOP 325
State-owned Property
Total Acres
Established Forest
Removeda
Total Acres
Reforested within
33% ½ Acre Grid
Total Acres
Reforested
Outside 33% ½
Acre grid within
Project ROW
Established Forest
Not Reforested
Hamburg Mountain Wildlife
Management Area 9.74 8.61 2.81 1.13
Waywayanda State Park 20.17 16.10 4.26 4.07
Bearfort Mountain Natural
Area 7.18 5.68 1.83 1.50
Long Pond Ironworks /
Ringwood State Park 8.06 5.94 1.42 2.12
TOTALS 45.15 36.33 10.32 8.82
a: Includes only the acres of established forest removed within the 33% half acres grids as shown in
figures in Appendix E.
Reforestation Plan
No Net Loss Reforestation Program
300 Line Project
Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
6-1
July 2010
6.0 References
American Nursery & Landscape Association’s (ANLA) American Standards for Nursery Stock, ANSI
Z60.1.
Cowardin, L. M., V. Carter, F. C. Golet, and E. T. LaRoe. 1979. Classification of Wetlands and
Deepwater Habitats of the United States. United States Fish and Wildlife Service Biological
Report 79/31, Washington D.C.
Natural Resources Conservation Service, United States Department of Agriculture, Soil Survey Staff.
2008a. Soil Data Mart. [Online WWW]. Available URL: http://soildatamart.nrcs.usda.gov
[Accessed September 30, 2008].
Natural Resources Conservation Service, United States Department of Agriculture, Soil Survey Staff.
2008b. Web Soil Survey. [Online WWW]. Available URL: http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/
[Accessed September 30, 2008].
Staff of the L.H. Bailey Hortorium, 1976. Hortus Third: A Concise Dictionary of Plants Cultivated in the
United States and Canada, Cornell University Press.
USDA. 2007. Web Soil Survey [Online WWW]. Available URL:
http://websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/. [Accessed September 11, 2008]. Last Updated June 20,
2007.
USDA, NRCS. 2008. Soil Survey Geographic (SSURGO) Database for Sussex County, New Jersey (NJ
037) and Passaic County (NJ031), New Jersey. [Online WWW]. Available URL:
http://SoilDataMart.nrcs.usda.gov/.
Vodak, Mark C. Undated. Reforestation and Forest Tree Planting: Guidelines for New Jersey.
Cooperative Extension Service Cook College, The State University of New Jersey, Rutgers.
E050.
Appendix A
General Information Form
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act N.J.S.A 13:1L-14.1 et seq.
General Information Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
Agency or Department Name: Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area
Contact Person: Bob Olsen
Title:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number: 973-383-0918 Fax:
E-Mail Address:
Project Name: 300 Line Project – Loop 325
Estimated Start Date: August 1, 2010 Estimated Project Duration: Nov 2011
Project Location: MP 0.0 to 1.25 - Wantage Township, Sussex County; MP 1.25 to MP 9.98 - Vernon Township, Sussex County; MP 9.98 to MP 15.98 - West Milford Township, Passaic County. Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area – MP 4.78 to MP 5.97
Total amount of acreage proposed to be deforested: 9.74
Amount of acreage proposed to be re-forested on-site: 8.61
Amount of acreage proposed to be reforested off-site: 2.81
(If reforestation objectives cannot be achieved on site the Secondary Reforestation Form must be filled out)
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act N.J.S.A 13:1L-14.1 et seq.
General Information Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
Agency or Department Name: Waywayanda State Park
Contact Person: Steve Ellis
Title: Acting Regional Superintendent Northern Region Office
Mailing Address: PO Box 398 Franklin, NJ 07416
Telephone Number: 973-827-8848 Fax: 973-209-8730
E-Mail Address:
Project Name: 300 Line Project – Loop 325
Estimated Start Date: August 1, 2010 Estimated Project Duration: Nov 2011
Project Location: MP 0.0 to 1.25 - Wantage Township, Sussex County; MP 1.25 to MP 9.98 - Vernon Township, Sussex County; MP 9.98 to MP 15.98 - West Milford Township, Passaic County. Waywayanda State Park – MP 9.25 to MP 11.34; MP 12.28 to MP 12.79
Total amount of acreage proposed to be deforested: 20.17
Amount of acreage proposed to be re-forested on-site: 16.10
Amount of acreage proposed to be reforested off-site: 4.26
(If reforestation objectives cannot be achieved on site the Secondary Reforestation Form must be filled out)
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act N.J.S.A 13:1L-14.1 et seq.
General Information Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
Agency or Department Name: Bearfort Mountain Natural Area / Office of Natural Lands Management
Contact Person: Robert Cartica
Title:
Mailing Address: 22 South Clinton Ave Trenton, NJ 08625
Telephone Number: 609-984-1339 Fax: 609-984-1427
E-Mail Address:
Project Name: 300 Line Project – Loop 325
Estimated Start Date: August 1, 2010 Estimated Project Duration: Nov 2011
Project Location: MP 0.0 to 1.25 - Wantage Township, Sussex County; MP 1.25 to MP 9.98 - Vernon Township, Sussex County; MP 9.98 to MP 15.98 - West Milford Township, Passaic County. Bearfort Mountain Natural Area – MP 11.34 to MP 12.28
Total amount of acreage proposed to be deforested: 7.18
Amount of acreage proposed to be re-forested on-site: 5.68
Amount of acreage proposed to be reforested off-site: 1.83
(If reforestation objectives cannot be achieved on site the Secondary Reforestation Form must be filled out)
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act N.J.S.A 13:1L-14.1 et seq.
General Information Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
Agency or Department Name: Long Pond Ironworks/Ringwood State Park
Contact Person: Rebecca Fitzgerald
Title:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number: 973-962-2240 Fax:
E-Mail Address:
Project Name: 300 Line Project – Loop 325
Estimated Start Date: August 1, 2010 Estimated Project Duration: Nov 2011
Project Location: MP 0.0 to 1.25 - Wantage Township, Sussex County; MP 1.25 to MP 9.98 - Vernon Township, Sussex County; MP 9.98 to MP 15.98 - West Milford Township, Passaic County.
Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park – MP 14.76 to MP 15.47; MP 15.85 to MP 15.96.
Total amount of acreage proposed to be deforested: 8.06
Amount of acreage proposed to be re-forested on-site: 5.94
Amount of acreage proposed to be reforested off-site: 1.42
(If reforestation objectives cannot be achieved on site the Secondary Reforestation Form must be filled out)
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix B
Off-Site Restoration Form
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act N.J.S.A 13:1L-14.1 et seq.
Off-Site Restoration Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
Off-Site Land Owner: Tennessee Gas Pipeline Company (Easement)
Mailing Address: 1001 Louisiana Street Houston Texas 77002
Off – Site Contact Person: Melissa Dettling
Title: Environmental Project Manager
Telephone Number: 713 420 5248 Fax: 713 4459276
E-Mail Address: Melissa.dettling@elpaso.com
Project Name: 300 Line Project – Loop 325
Estimated Start Date: August 1, 2010 Estimated Project Duration: Nov 2011
Project Location: MP 0.0 to 1.25 - Wantage Township, Sussex County; MP 1.25 to MP 9.98 - Vernon Township, Sussex County; MP 9.98 to MP 15.98 - West Milford Township, Passaic County. Loop 325 crosses the following New Jersey state-owned properties: Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area – MP 4.78 to MP 5.97; Waywayanda State Park – MP 9.25 to MP 11.34; MP 12.28 to MP 12.79; Bearfort Mountain Natural Area – MP 11.34 to MP 12.28;
Long Pond Ironworks / Ringwood State Park – MP 14.76 to MP 15.47; MP 15.85 to MP 15.96.
State Entity Contact Person: Donna Mahon (If different from General Information Form) Title: Executive Assistant NHRG Office of the Assistant Comissioner
Telephone Number: 609-292-3541 Fax:
Estimated Planting Date: Fall 2011 (September 1 through November 30) or Spring 2012 (March 1 through June 30)
Amount of compensated acreage to be reforested off-site: 10.32
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix C
Monetary Compensation Form
asdfasdfasdfasdf
No Net Loss Act P.L. 1993, c. 106 (C.13:1L-14.2)
Reforestation Monetary Compensation Form No-Net Loss Reforestation Program
State Entity: New Jersey Division of Parks and Forestry / New Jersey Office of Natural Lands Management (Hamburg Mountain Wildlife Management Area / Waywayanda State Park / Bearfort Mountain Natural Area / Long Pond Ironworks-Ringwood State Park)
Project Name: 300 Line Project
Total Forested Acreage Removed: 45.15
Proposed Acreage Reforested on Site: 36.33
Proposed Acreage Reforested Off-Site: 10.32
Proposed Acreage Not Reforested:
Established Forest: 8.82
Emerging Forest:
Seedling Forest:
State Entity Financial Officer:
Title:
Mailing Address:
Telephone Number: Fax:
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix D
Photographs
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix E
Figures
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix F
Vegetation Community Mapping
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix G
Tree Planting Diagram
asdfasdfasdfasdf
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix H
300 Line Project Environmental Construction Plan
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Prepared for:
Houston, TX
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRUCTION PLAN
300 LINE PROJECT New Jersey
AECOM, Inc. June 2010 Document No.: 02521-088-700
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey i
June 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... 1-1
2.0 SITE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Location and Description of Facilities ............................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.1 Pipeline Facilities ............................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Aboveground Facilities ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Land Requirements ......................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.1 Pipeline Facilities ............................................................................................................... 2-4 2.2.2 Aboveground Facilities ...................................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.3 Staging Areas and Pipeyards ............................................................................................ 2-7 2.2.4 Additional Temporary Workspace ..................................................................................... 2-7
3.0 Supervision and Inspection .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Inspector Responsibilities ................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Unanticipated Discovery Plan – Cultural Resource Sites .............................................................. 3-3
4.0 Erosion and Sediment Control ............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Standard Construction Methods (Figures CS, OCR, R1A, R1B, WS) .......................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Clearing .............................................................................................................................. 4-2 4.1.2 Grading (Figures R5A, R5B) ............................................................................................. 4-3 4.1.3 Ditching .............................................................................................................................. 4-6 4.1.4 Lowering In / Backfilling ..................................................................................................... 4-7 4.1.5 Hydrostatic Testing (Figure ED2) .................................................................................... 4-10 4.1.6 Restoration and Revegetation ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.2 Safety ............................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.3 Access Roads (Figure ACR) ......................................................................................................... 4-15 4.3.1 Road Entrance/Exit Protection (Figure RC) .................................................................... 4-16
4.4 Pipe Yards ..................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.5 Inadvertent Disturbance Off Right-Of-Way ................................................................................... 4-16
5.0 Specialized Construction Methods ................................................................................................... 5-18
5.1 Blasting .......................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.2 The Two-Tone Approach (Figures R5A, R5B) ............................................................................. 5-19
5.3 Drag Sections ................................................................................................................................ 5-20
5.4 Stovepipe ....................................................................................................................................... 5-20
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey ii
June 2010
5.5 Topsoil Salvage and Storage (Figure R2A, R2B, R3A, R3B, R4A, R4B) ................................... 5-20
5.6 Residential Area Construction ....................................................................................................... 5-22 5.6.1 Stove-Pipe Construction Method .................................................................................... 5-23 5.6.2 Drag-Section Method ....................................................................................................... 5-23
5.7 Boring (Figure BRC) ...................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.8 Jacking ........................................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.9 Directional Drilling (Figure DD1) ................................................................................................... 5-24
5.10 Equipment Crossovers .................................................................................................................. 5-24
5.11 Agricultural Area Construction (R3A, R3B, R4A, R4B) ................................................................ 5-24 5.11.1 Grading ............................................................................................................................ 5-25 5.11.2 Ditching / Lowering-In / Backfilling .................................................................................. 5-25 5.11.3 Drain Tiles (Figures DT1, DT2) ....................................................................................... 5-25 5.11.4 Restoration and Revegetation ......................................................................................... 5-26
5.12 Wetland Crossings ........................................................................................................................ 5-26 5.12.1 General Conditions .......................................................................................................... 5-27 5.12.2 Wetland Crossing Procedures ........................................................................................ 5-29
5.13 Waterbody Crossings (Figure STC) .............................................................................................. 5-30 5.13.1 General Conditions .......................................................................................................... 5-31 5.13.2 Waterbody Crossing Procedures .................................................................................... 5-34
5.14 Combined Wetland / Waterbody Crossings ................................................................................. 5-36
6.0 Site-Specific Information ...................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Notification ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1
7.0 Spill Prevention and Control Plan ....................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Preventative Measures .................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1.1 Training .............................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1.2 Equipment Inspection / Maintenance ................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.3 Refueling ............................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.4 Storage ............................................................................................................................... 7-2 7.1.5 Personnel Support ............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2 Impact Minimization Measures ........................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 Suggested Equipment List .............................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3.1 Terrestrial Construction ..................................................................................................... 7-4 7.3.2 Waterbody and Wetland Crossings .................................................................................. 7-5
8.0 Oil and Hazardous Materials Management......................................................................................... 8-1
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey iii
June 2010
9.0 ECP Exceptions to the Commission’s Plan and Procedures .......................................................... 9-2
9.1 Wetland and Waterbody Construction and Mitigation Measures ................................................... 9-2
LIST OF APPENDICES Appendix A Figures
LIST OF TABLES
Table 2.1-1 P Pipeline Facilities for the 300 Line Project ............................................................................... 2-2
Table 2.1-2 Proposed Compressor Station 325 Modification for the 300 Line Project .................................. 2-2
Table 2.1-3 Proposed Appurtenant Aboveground Facilities for the 300 Line Project .................................... 2-3
Table 2.2-8 Land Requirements for the 300 Line Project Pipeline Facilities .................................................. 2-5
Table 2.2-9 Land Requirements for the 300 Line Project Compressor Station 325 Modification ................. 2-6
Table 2.2-10 Land requirements for the 300 Line Project Appurtenant Aboveground Facilities ................... 2-7
Table 5.3-1 Steep Slopes (>28 Degrees) Crossed by the 300 Line Project ............................................... 5-20
Table 9.2-1 New Jersey Wetland Seed and Mulch Rates .............................................................................. 9-2
Table 9.2-2 New Jersey Upland Temporary Restoration Seed and Fertilizer Rates ................................... 9-22
Table 9.2-3 New Jersey Upland Permanent Restoration Seed and Fertilizer Rates ..................................... 9-3
Table 9.2-4 Areas of >75 Feet of Workspace Within Wetlands for the 300 Line Project ............................. 9-4
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey iv
June 2010
List of Figures Figure ACR Typical Access Road Profile
Figure BRC Bored Road Crossing
Figure CF1 Erosion Control Fabric
Figure CF2 Erosion Control Fabric Installation Detail
Figure CO Crossover Existing Pipeline
Figure CS Pipeline Construction Sequence
Figure DD1 Directional Drill
Figure DPCA Dam Pipeline Crossing
Figure DPCB Dam Pipeline Crossing
Figure DT1 Typical Drain Tile Repair
Figure DT2 Typical Drain Tile Repair
Figure EC1 Equipment Crossing, Culvert Bridge
Figure EC2 Equipment Crossing, Mat Bridge
Figure EC3 Equipment Crossing, Rock and Flume Crossing
Figure EC4 Equipment Crossing, Portable Bridge
Figure ED1 Trench Dewatering Energy Dissipater
Figure ED2 Pipeline Hydrotest Dewatering Energy Dissipater
Figure FB Pipeline/Trench Dewatering Filter Bags
Figure FPC Foreign Pipeline Crossing
Figure OCR Open Cut Road Crossing
Figure R1A Construction ROW Existing Line North
Figure R1B Construction ROW Existing Line South
Figure R2A Topsoil Salvage Trench Only Existing Line North
Figure R2B Topsoil Salvage Trench Only Existing Line South
Figure R3A Topsoil Salvage Trench and Spoil Side Existing Line North
Figure R3B Topsoil Salvage Trench and Spoil Side Existing Line South
Figure R4A Topsoil Salvage Full ROW Existing Line North
Figure R4B Topsoil Salvage Full ROW Existing Line South
Figure R5A Side Slope Construction Existing Line North
Figure R5B Side Slope Construction Existing Line South
Figure RC Rock Construction Entrance with Culvert
Figure RRC Typical Railroad Crossing
Figure SB Permanent and Temporary Slope Breakers
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey v
June 2010
Figure SB1 Stream Bank Stabilization, Seed and Mulch
Figure SB2 Stream Bank Stabilization, Jute Blanket with Seed and Mulch
Figure SF1 Silt Fencing Installation at Waterbody, Roadway, and Railroad
Figure SRC Special Residential Construction Work Locations
Figure ST1 Straw Bale Installation at Waterbody, Roadway, and Railroad
Figure STC Stream Crossing
Figure TB1 Trench Breakers, Sandbag
Figure TB2 Trench Breakers, Foam
Figure WC1A Dry Waterbody Crossing, Pump Around
Figure WC1B Dry Waterbody Crossing, Pump Around
Figure WC2A Dry Waterbody Crossing, Flumed
Figure WC2B Dry Waterbody Crossing Flumed
Figure WS Construction Equipment Wash Station
Figure WW1A Wet Waterbody Crossing
Figure WW1B Wet Waterbody Crossing
Figure WW2A Wetland Construction
Figure WW2B1 Wetland Construction
Figure WW2B Wetland Construction
Figure WW3A Push/Pull Wetland Construction
Figure WW3B Push/Pull Wetland Construction
Figure WW4 Temporary Soil Containment Berm for Waterbody Trench Spoil
Figure WW5A Equipment Wetland Crossing
Figure WW5B Equipment Wetland Crossing
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 1-1
June 2010
1.0 INTRODUCTION
Tennessee Gas Pipeline Company (“Tennessee”), an El Paso Energy Company, has developed this Environmental Construction Plan, or “ECP” specifically for the 300 Line Project (the “Project”). The ECP describes the basic environmental construction techniques that Tennessee (and its Contractors) will implement during and following construction and maintenance, to protect the environment and to minimize potential effects of the pipeline construction and maintenance. Tennessee has based the specifications in the ECP on procedures successfully used in constructing, operating and maintaining transmission systems throughout the United States, and on guidelines and recommendations from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (“ACOE” or the “Corps”), the U.S. Department of Agriculture, the Natural Resources Conservation Service (“NRCS”), and the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (“FERC” or the “Commission”). Additionally, this ECP meets all conditions outlined in the Commission's Wetland and Waterbody Construction and Mitigation Procedures (the “Procedures”) and Upland Erosion Control, Revegetation and Maintenance Plan (the “Plan”) except in areas where Tennessee is requesting a waiver from specific conditions as outlined in Section 9.0.
The ECP covers the following subjects: Section 2.0 provides site description information. Section 3.0 discusses construction supervision, environmental inspection and the responsibilities of the environmental inspector. Section 4.0 discusses preconstruction planning, standard construction methods and erosion and sedimentation control practices. Section 5.0 discusses specialized construction methods including waterbody and wetland crossing procedures. Section 6.0 identifies site-specific construction information applicable to environmentally sensitive areas. Section 7.0 discusses measures to prevent, contain, and control spills. Section 8.0 discusses contaminated materials handling. Section 9.0 lists exceptions to the Commission’s Plan and Procedures requested for this project.
The ECP incorporates as one document Tennessee's Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, Wetland and Waterbody Crossing Plan and Spill Prevention and Control Plan. By incorporating the above plans into one concise document and adding site specific information, Tennessee is able to tailor the ECP to the requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan required under the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (“EPA”) storm water permit or equivalent state program.
The ECP has been modified to include additional requirements that have been imposed by the New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection (“NJ DEP”), NRCS Soil and Water Conservation Districts, County Conservation Districts, the Corps, and other federal, state, or local agencies during the process of issuing permits. More specifically, this ECP has been modified to include additional requirements of NJ DEP’s Standards for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in New Jersey (July 1999). Additionally, this combined approach will allow Contractors and Environmental Inspectors to reference all environmental conditions in one document. This document will be included as part of the construction contract.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-1
June 2010
2.0 SITE DESCRIPTION
Tennessee Gas Pipeline Company (“Tennessee”) proposes to construct and operate the 300 Line Project (“the Project”) in northern Pennsylvania and northwestern New Jersey. The proposed Project will include construction of approximately 127 miles of 30-inch pipeline consisting of seven separate pipeline loops in northern Pennsylvania, totaling approximately 111 miles, and one pipeline loop in northwestern New Jersey totaling approximately 15.98 miles. To the extent that it is practicable and feasible, Tennessee has located the pipeline loops within and adjacent to the right-of-way (“ROW”) associated with its existing 24-inch pipeline designated as the 300 Line. Additionally, as part of the Project, Tennessee proposes to construct two new compressor stations near its existing 300 Line ROW in northwestern Pennsylvania, as well as make improvements and install system upgrades at seven of its existing compressor station facilities in Pennsylvania and New Jersey (please refer to a more detailed description below). The maximum allowable operating pressure (“MAOP”) of the 300 Line Project pipeline loop facilities will be 1170 psig.
The proposed construction ROW in upland areas will typically consist of a 100-foot-wide corridor of which there will be a 50-foot-wide permanent ROW and 50 feet of temporary construction ROW. The proposed construction ROW in the majority of wetland and waterbody areas will be 75-feet wide. Areas where greater than 75 feet of construction workspace are required are also detailed in Resource Report 2, Table 2.3-16, including site-specific justification for increasing the construction width. Typical additional temporary workspace (“ATWS”) of 25 feet wide by varying lengths along the pipeline will be required in addition to the proposed construction ROW to account for site-specific issues including side slope, topsoil segregation, road and waterbody crossings, etc. (please refer to the alignment sheets).
2.1 Location and Description of Facilities 2.1.1 Pipeline Facilities The pipeline facilities will consist of seven separate looping segments of 30-inch pipeline totaling approximately 127 miles in length and installed generally parallel to Tennessee’s existing 300 Line pipeline at a typical offset of 25 feet. The pipeline loops will be located within and directly adjacent to the existing pipeline ROW, to the extent practicable. The seven looping segments vary in length from 14.9 miles to 22.5 miles, and each of the pipeline loops have been assigned separate number designations, as detailed in Table 1.0-2 above. Six of the pipeline looping segments are single discrete loops; however Loop 319 will be constructed in two sections consisting of (i) a 1.2-mile segment of loop pipeline located upstream of Compressor Station 319, and (ii) a 16.8 mile segment located downstream of Compressor Station 319. The maximum allowable operating pressure (“MAOP”) of the existing 300 Line in the area where the new loop pipeline facilities are proposed is 1,170 pounds-per-square-inch-gauge (“psig”). Normal operating pressures for the existing 300 Line varies from 700 to 1,000 psig. Table 2.1-1 provides a summary of the individual pipeline loops and provides MP designations within each township, county, and state for each pipeline loop segment.
Figures 1.1-2c through 1.1-2i depicts the pipeline loop alignments on 7.5-minute USGS topographic map excerpts in Attachment A to Resource Report 1 of the FERC Environmental Report (“ER”). These are also shown on full-sized maps in Volume II, - Appendix L of the FERC ER.
2.1.2 Aboveground Facilities This section details information related to all of the associated aboveground facilities required for the Project in New Jersey. These facilities include new and modified compressor stations, new main line valves (“MLVs”), and other pipeline appurtenances. Table 2.1-2 provides a summary, by location, of all new and modified compressor station facilities associated with the Project. Table 2.1-3 provides a summary and location of all new appurtenant aboveground facilities including MLVs, and internal inspection facilities (e.g., pig launchers and
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-2
June 2010
receivers). These facility locations are shown on 7.5-minute USGS topographic map excerpts designated as Figures 1.1-2a through 1.1-2i located in Attachment A to Resource Report 1 of the FERC ER and as full-sized maps in Volume II, - Appendix L of the ER.
TABLE 2.1-1 PROPOSED PIPELINE FACILITIES FOR
THE 300 LINE PROJECT
Loop ID Loop Segment
Outside Diameter (“OD”)
Mileposta Length (miles) Township County State Begin End
7 325 30-inches 0.0 1.25 1.25 Wantage Sussex
NJ 1.25 9.98 8.73 Vernon Passaic 9.98 15.98 6.0 West Milford Loop 325 Subtotal 15.98
a: Milepost designations measured against the individual pipeline loop segment.
TABLE 2.1-2 PROPOSED COMPRESSOR STATION 325 MODIFICATION
FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT
Facility New / Modified
Horsepower* Township County / State
Current Market** Replaced** Total Station
325 Modified 9,442 11,178 9,442 20,620 Wantage Sussex / NJ
* All current horsepower numbers are based on the existing site rating. Horsepower for all new gas turbine engines is based on ISO rating which applies to Station 325.
** The term “Market” refers to the Market Component of the Project, and the term “Replaced” refers to the Replacement Component of the Project.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-3
June 2010
TABLE 2.1-3 PROPOSED APPURTENANT ABOVEGROUND FACILITIES FOR THE
300 LINE PROJECT
Loop IDb Facility New / Modified
Approximate Mileposta Township County / State
325
MLV 326-2 New 4.2 Vernon Sussex / NJ
MLV 327-2 New 11.4 West Milford Passaic / NJ
MLV 327-2A New 14.7 West Milford Passaic / NJ
Pig Receiver New 15.98 West Milford Passaic / NJ
a: Milepost designations measured against the individual pipeline loop segment.
2.1.2.1 Compressor Stations
At Station 325, minor utility upgrades would be limited to the replacement of the components that comprise the existing electric feed to the station, which may include the transformer or transformer bank, transformer primary wire/cable, transformer secondary cable, and/or circuit protection devices, such as breakers. Based on the assumption that the respective utilities’ existing power distribution infrastructure is sufficient to support the incremental load requirements for these stations, no modifications to the utilities’ overall distribution networks, such as line change outs, will be required. The respective local utility owns and operates the purchase power feed to each compressor station, and they would continue to do so after these modifications have been made (see the individual compressor station discussions below for additional detail on existing and required utilities). The emergency generators and uninterruptible power supplies for critical services will also be included. Each new compressor station site will be designed to manage hazardous waste containment and disposal. An emergency shutdown system (“ESD”) will also be installed at each new station. Table 2.1-2 provides a summary of the proposed new and modified compressor station facilities associated with the Project. Compressor station locations are depicted on 7.5-minute USGS topographic map excerpts (Figures 1.1-2a through 1.1-2i in Attachment A to Resource Report 1 of the FERC ER) and on full-sized maps in Volume II - Appendix L of the FERC ER.
Station 325 Compressor (Modified)
Tennessee proposes to replace two compressor units, totaling 9,442 hp, with two new 10,310 hp natural gas driven turbine compressor units at its existing Station 325 located in Sussex County, NJ. The new compressor units will be installed in the existing compressor building. The installation of these units replaces existing hp and increases station power by 11,178 hp. New compression equipment will be installed inside the existing compressor building after the existing compression equipment is removed for replacement. The concrete foundation that supports the compression equipment inside the existing compressor building will be modified as necessary to provide structural support to match the new compression equipment configuration. New auxiliary equipment will require new foundations outside the existing compressor building. The existing duct penetrations in the building walls will be modified as necessary to accommodate air inlet and exhaust ducts associated with the new equipment. The existing building crane will be modified for a larger lifting capacity. Minor construction will be required to upgrade the existing electric power utility service into the station, but no new utility ROWs are required for the upgrade. No additional visual screening is planned beyond existing on-site visual screening. The outdoor lighting for the existing compressor station is limited during un-manned night time operation to the minimum amount required for security. The station security system incorporates outdoor video cameras that must have sufficient outdoor lighting to record clear images at night. New outdoor lighting may be required in
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-4
June 2010
the area around the new filter-separator equipment. If new lights are installed, the lights will have directional control or they will be positioned in a manner that minimizes their visibility in the direction of local residences. Figure 1.1-2i in the FERC ER provides a USGS topographic map excerpt of the location of Station 325 compressor facility.
2.1.2.2 Main Line Valves
Loop 325 will require the installation of new 30-inch MLV assemblies. The MLV assemblies will be sited adjacent to existing MLV sites located along the existing 300 Line 24-inch pipeline to the extent practicable. This will allow for both valve assemblies to be located within a single fenced enclosure. Temporary and permanent impacts associated with the MLVs on the loop segments will be located within those designated for the pipeline loop segments. A blow-down valve is incorporated in the design of each MLV assembly. Table 2.1-3 provides a summary and location of all appurtenant aboveground facilities associated with the Project. Additionally, all appurtenant aboveground facilities, including MLV locations, have been identified on the applicable loop segment USGS topographic map excerpts in the FERC ER.
2.1.2.3 Pig Launchers / Receivers
To comply with Tennessee’s integrity management program, the Project has been designed to incorporate aboveground facilities to accommodate internal inspection of the proposed pipeline loop. The launcher/receiver facilities will consist of aboveground 36-inch trap barrels with 30-inch trap valves, 24-inch side valves, 8-inch kicker valves and other miscellaneous safety and isolation piping and valves. The launcher and receiver facilities will consist of discrete aboveground enclosures installed within or immediately adjacent to Tennessee’s existing ROW and will include a gravel or grassed base, site access, chain-link fence enclosure for security purposes, and identification and emergency signage. A blow-down valve is incorporated in the design of each launcher or receiver. Table 2.1-3 provides a summary including location of all appurtenant aboveground facilities associated with the Project. All appurtenant aboveground facilities, including pig launcher and receiver locations, have been identified on the applicable loop segment USGS topographic map excerpt in the FERC ER. Volume III – Appendix Q of the FERC ER includes pig launcher and receiver typical details.
2.2 Land Requirements 2.2.1 Pipeline Facilities The construction work area consists of temporary workspace (“TWS”), ATWS, access roads, staging areas, pipe and contractor yards, and existing permanent ROW required for the new pipeline. Typically, pipeline construction will require up to 100 feet of workspace (equivalent to the Land Affected During Construction column in Table 2.2-1) abutting the existing ROW. A detailed discussion of construction and operational (permanent) acreage requirements by land use type is presented in Resource Report 8 of the FERC ER. Pipeline ROW workspace configurations and dimensions are indicated on the aerial alignment sheets in Volume II – Appendix O and in the Typical Construction Workspace Configurations in Volume II – Appendix C of the FERC ER.
Tennessee proposes to use the typical construction ROW configurations. The construction workspace consists of the combinations of existing permanent ROW, proposed permanent ROW, and proposed TWS shown in the tables below (please also refer to typical ROW configuration drawings – Volume II – Appendix C of the FERC ER). Vegetation within the permanent ROW will be maintained in an herbaceous state, except in wetlands and adjacent to perennial streams, where maintenance clearing of woody vegetation will be limited to a 10-foot-wide strip centered directly over the pipeline. Here, the remaining temporary and permanent corridor will revert to its pre-construction land use/land cover once construction is complete. Crop production will be allowed to continue in agricultural areas. Typical cross sections for pipeline construction/operation and topsoil segregation are shown in Volume II - Appendix C of the FERC ER.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-5
June 2010
TABLE 2.2-8 LAND REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT
LOOP 325 PIPELINE FACILITIES
Loop ID Facility
ROW Cross-Sectiona Length
(miles) / Number of
Sites
Land Affected During Construction (acres)
Land Affected During Operation (acres)
Total Drawing Number Mileposts
Within Existing
Permanent Easement b
Outside Existing
Permanent Easement
Within Existing
Permanent Easement
New Permanent Easement
325
Pipeline Figure R1A Figure R1B 17.27 miles 43.40c 78.10c 24.24 d 25.02d 170.76
Add’l Temp. Workspace N/A N/Ae 109 sites 1.40 60.13 0 0 61.53
Cathodic Protection Systemf
N/A To be Determined
To be Determined
To be Determined
To be Determined
To be Determined
To be Determined
To be Determined
Pipe / Contractor
Yards N/A N/A 1 site 0 15.60 0 0 15.60
Access Roads N/A N/Ae 6 roads 0 8.98 0 0 8.98
LOOP 325 TOTAL INCLUDING EXISTING PERMANENT EASEMENT 44.80 162.81 24.24 25.02
256.87 207.61 49.26
a: See Volume II - Appendix C of the FERC ER for Typical ROW Configurations. b: Permanent easement associated with existing 300 Line (variable width). c: Temporary workspace only. d: New Permanent easement associated with pipeline loops. e: See Resource Report 8 for detailed locational information of Additional Temporary Workspace areas and Access Roads. f: Land requirements for cathodic protection systems will be included in the Final Environmental Report.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-6
June 2010
2.2.2 Aboveground Facilities The aboveground facilities proposed for the Project include both minor aboveground piping associated with valve sites and internal inspection, and major aboveground facilities including modified existing compressor station 325. The land requirements for each new and modified compressor station facility are summarized in Table 2.2-9. The minor aboveground facilities proposed for the Project, including new MLVs and internal inspection facilities, require smaller areas for development and can typically be operated within the proposed permanent easement associated with the pipeline loop. Where the existing ROW area would not accommodate installation of the minor aboveground facilities associated with the Project, Tennessee will either negotiate an easement for additional land adjacent to the existing ROW or will purchase property traversed by the existing pipeline ROW for construction of the facilities. Table 2.2-10 provides a summary of the land requirements for construction and operation of minor appurtenant aboveground facilities for the Project.
TABLE 2.2-9 LAND REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT
COMPRESSOR STATION FACILITIES
Facility New / Modified
Approximate Milepost Township County /
State
Land Affected During
Constructiona (acres)
Land Affected During
Operationb (acres)
Total
Station 325 Modifiedc Not Applicable Wantage Sussex / NJ 5.5 0.18 5.68
a: Land Affected During Construction is based on the extent of temporary workspace and additional temporary
workspace. b: Land Affected During Operation is based on the extent of the land that will be maintained during operation of the
aboveground facilities. c: The land identified for construction and operation of the existing compressor station modifications is currently owned
by Tennessee. No new land acquisition will be required for the existing compressor stations. Land impacts identified will be to existing, pre-disturbed Tennessee property. No new land impacts will occur from the modified compressor station facilities .
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 2-7
June 2010
TABLE 2.2-10 LAND REQUIREMENTS FOR THE 300 LINE PROJECT
APPURTENANT ABOVEGROUND FACILITIESa
Loop IDd Facility Approximate Milepost Township County / State
Land Affected During
Constructionb (acres)
Land Affected During
Operationc
(acres)
Total
325
MLV 326-2 4.2 Vernon Sussex / NJ 0.1 0.02 0.12
MLV 327-2 11.4 West Milford Passaic / NJ 0.1 0.02 0.12
MLV 327-2A 14.7 West Milford Passaic / NJ 0.1 0.02 0.12
Pig Receiver 17.26 Ringwood Passaic / NJ 0.6 0.3 0.90
Loop 325 Total 0.9 0.36 1.26
a: The acreage of land affected during construction and operation of the proposed appurtenant aboveground facilities is included within the impacts associated with each pipeline loop.
b: Land Affected During Construction is based on the extent of temporary workspace and additional temporary workspace.
c: Land Affected During Operation is based on the extent of the land that will be maintained during operation of the aboveground facilities.
2.2.3 Staging Areas and Pipeyards Locations in the vicinity of the pipeline loop have been identified for potential use as pipeyards and/or contractor yards during construction of the Project. Tennessee has determined and identified the approximate acreage necessary for use as staging areas and pipeyards for each of the pipeline loops, and has included these acreages in the overall land requirements for the Project, as detailed in Tables 2.2-1 through 2.2-8. These areas will be used for equipment, pipe, and material storage, as well as temporary field offices and pipe preparation/field assembly areas. Site selection and acquisition will continue throughout the planning and permitting stages of the Project. Please refer to Resource Report 8 of the FERC ER for additional information regarding the pipeyards/staging areas associated with the Project. Locations of proposed staging areas, pipeyards, and contractor yards are included on both the USGS topographic map excerpts included as Attachment A to Resource Report 1 of the FERC ER as well as the full-size USGS topographic maps in Volume II – Appendix L of the FERC ER.
2.2.4 Additional Temporary Workspace ATWS areas are typically required at road, railroad, wetlands, and waterbody crossing locations and for areas requiring specialized construction techniques, including steep slopes. The configuration of ATWS areas are based upon site-specific conditions and will vary in accordance with the construction methodology and crossing type.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 3-1
June 2010
3.0 Supervision and Inspection
Tennessee will use a minimum of one qualified, full-time Environmental Inspector (“EI”) for each pipeline loop section during Project construction, as well as a minimum of one Lead Environmental Inspector (“LEI”) to oversee the EI staff. Additionally, one dedicated EI would be assigned to each of the two new compressor station facilities proposed for the Project while earth disturbance activities are conducted, and may be reduced to one EI for both new compressor station sites, as approved by FERC. The EIs assigned to oversee construction for the individual pipeline loop sections will also oversee the construction for the modifications to the applicable compressor stations. Tennessee conducts in-house Environmental Inspector training to ensure that the Environmental Inspectors will be able to carry out their duties as described in this document and that construction activities will be in compliance with the ECP requirements and with requirements of applicable federal, state and local environmental permits and approvals and environmental requirements in landowner easement agreements.
3.1 Inspector Responsibilities The EI will review all Project documents (ROW descriptions, permits, alignment sheets, and relevant plans) prior to construction. During construction, the EI as well as other inspectors are also responsible for:
• inspecting activities daily to verify and document that Contractors are complying with the ECP, the Commission Certificate environmental conditions and mitigation measures, and applicable federal, state and local permit requirements and landowner agreements;
• identifying, documenting, and overseeing corrective actions, as necessary to bring an activity back in to compliance;
• Verifying that the limits of authorized construction work areas and locations of access roads are properly marked before clearing;
• Verifying the location of signs and highly visible flagging marking the boundaries of sensitive resource areas, waterbodies, wetlands, or areas with special requirements along the construction work area;
• ensuring that construction activities occur within authorized work areas;
• identifying erosion/sediment control and soil stabilization needs in all areas;
• ensuring that the location of dewatering structures and slope breakers will not direct water into known cultural resources sites or locations of sensitive species;
• verifying that trench dewatering activities do not result in the deposition of sand, silt, and/or sediment near the point of discharge into a wetland or waterbody. If such deposition is occurring, the dewatering activity shall be stopped and the design of the discharge shall be changed to prevent reoccurrence;
• ensuring that subsoil and topsoil are tested in agricultural and residential areas to measure compaction and determine the need for corrective action;
• advising the Lead Environmental Inspector when conditions (such as wet weather) make it advisable to restrict construction activities in agricultural areas and streams;
• ensuring restoration of contours and topsoil;
• verifying that imported soils used as fill and/or additional cover in sensitive areas (i.e., agricultural, residential and wetland areas) are from an approved source and have been certified as free of noxious weeds and soil pests, unless otherwise approved by the landowner;
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 3-2
June 2010
• ensuring that the soil profile is restored as required;
• Determining the need for and ensuring that erosion controls are properly installed, as necessary to prevent sediment flow into wetlands, waterbodies, sensitive areas and onto roads;
• Inspecting and ensuring the maintenance of temporary erosion controls at least: a) on a daily basis in areas of active construction or equipment operation, b) on a weekly basis in areas with no construction or equipment operation; and c) within 24 hours of each 0.5 inches of rainfall;
• Ensuring the repair of all ineffective temporary erosion control measures within 24 hours of identification;
• Keeping records of compliance with the environmental conditions of the FERC Certificate, and the mitigation measures proposed by the Project sponsor in the application submitted to the FERC, and other Federal or state environmental permits during active construction and restoration;
• photo-documenting sensitive areas and workspaces before, during, and after construction;
• documenting activities with daily logs, weekly reports, and other required documentation;
• maintaining the ECP during construction (e.g., updating Project alignment drawings to illustrate the locations of additional temporary and permanent erosion controls);
• Identifying areas that should be given special attention to ensure stabilization and restoration after the construction phase.
• coordinating and/or performing updated environmental training as new contracted personnel begin working on construction;
• educating other inspectors on Project specific environmental concerns;
• monitoring waste collection and disposal;
• identifying potential problems and initiating appropriate actions prior to occurrence;
• monitoring hydrostatic test fill and spill activities and conducting sampling of the test water (see Section 4.1.5);
• working with water and wetland resource agencies to assure the ECP is properly implemented;
• reviewing the Contractor’s pre-job inventory and location of lubricants, fuels, and other materials which could be discharged;
• consulting with Tennessee to determine reportable spill quantities for materials on the inventory;
• classifying each material on the pre-job inventory and within the designated storage area as hazardous or non-hazardous;
• identifying, in conjunction with the Division Environmental Coordinator, the approved waste transporters and disposal sites for both hazardous and non-hazardous wastes;
• approving the Contractor's spill containment equipment and spill response procedures and impact minimization measures submitted pursuant to Section 7.1.3;
• defining the duties and coordinating the responses of all persons involved in cleaning up a spill;
• maintaining, with support from Tennessee, an up-to-date list of names, addresses, and phone numbers of all persons to be contacted in case of a spill (Detailed procedure in Section 7.2); and
• ensuring the Contractor conducts training for spill prevention and impact minimization.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 3-3
June 2010
The EI will be supervised by and responsible to the Lead Environmental Inspector (“LEI”) who has overall authority over construction. Each EI will have peer status with the other inspectors. The EI will correct and report compliance problems, have "stop-task" authority and make "stop-work" recommendations to the LEI who has overall Project "stop-work" authority for a Project spread.
3.2 Unanticipated Discovery Plan – Cultural Resource Sites In order to minimize the potential for the accidental discovery of cultural resources, Tennessee conducted a detailed archaeological reconnaissance of the proposed Project area. To ensure that Tennessee maintains full and complete compliance with all Federal and state regulations concerning the protection of cultural resources, an Accidental Discovery Plan has been prepared for the Project.
All inspectors have the responsibility to monitor the construction sites for potential archaeological remains throughout construction. If, during the course of construction, potential cultural resource remains are identified, the EI will immediately stop tasks in the vicinity of the potential find and make stop work recommendations to the LEI. Should stop work authority be deemed necessary, Tennessee will notify the appropriate State Historic Preservation Office (“SHPO”) and the Commission, and will hire a state-approved archaeological consultant who will survey the site and provide an immediate verbal report to Tennessee and the SHPO. Tennessee will notify the Commission of the report and continue to consult with the appropriate SHPO’s office as per the requirements of Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act.
SHPO contact(s) are listed below:
Vincent Maresca New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection Historic Preservation Office P.O. Box 404 Trenton, NJ 08625-0404 (609) 984-5816
If the unanticipated discovery is determined to be ineligible for inclusion in the National Register, Tennessee will proceed with the Project following written concurrence from the SHPO and approval from the Commission. If the site is determined to be potentially eligible for inclusion in the National Register, additional work such as a Determination of Eligibility or Data Recovery will be performed as required/approved by the SHPO and the Commission. Further work at the site will be suspended until all criteria of Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act and other related Federal and state regulations have been successfully completed.
In the event that human remains are discovered during construction, the LEI will immediately halt work and notify the local law enforcement agency and medical examiner. If remains are found not to be of recent origin, Tennessee will contact the appropriate SHPO and begin consultation to ensure that state laws are followed for state or private land and that all provisions of the Native American Grave Protection and Repatriation Act (“NAGPRA”) are followed for Federal or Tribal land. Provision for security to protect suspected burials from vandalism must be taken. Tennessee will notify the Commission of the situation and will continue to keep the Commission informed as to the progress of further consultation.
If the unanticipated discovery of human remains is determined by the SHPO and the Commission to be ineligible for inclusion in the National Register, Tennessee will proceed with coordinating the proper removal of the remains through cooperation from the local police, medical examiner, SHPO, and the Commission. Only after the human
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 3-4
June 2010
remains have been properly removed from the site should construction of the pipeline facilities in the site area be resumed.
Under no circumstances should human remains be removed from the site without completing all coordination processes with the local police, medical examiner, the SHPO, Native American representatives, as appropriate, and the Commission. Further work at the site will be suspended until all criteria of Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act and other related state and Federal regulations have been successfully completed.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-1
June 2010
4.0 Erosion and Sediment Control
Tennessee’s objective is to minimize the potential for erosion and sedimentation during pipeline construction, and to effectively restore the ROW and other disturbed areas. Tennessee will meet these objectives by employing the erosion and sediment control measures contained in this section. These erosion and sediment control measures will serve as minimum standards during construction. In general, the measures are designed to minimize erosion and sedimentation by:
• minimizing the quantity and duration of soil exposure;
• protecting critical areas during construction by reducing the velocity of and redirecting runoff;
• installing and maintaining erosion and sediment control measures during construction;
• establishing vegetation as soon as possible following final grading; and
• inspecting the ROW and maintaining erosion and sediment controls as necessary until final stabilization is achieved.
The EI are the primary responsible party(s) for ensuring that Contractors implement and maintain erosion and sediment control measures on a daily basis during the construction phase. Specific responsibilities of the EI are described in Section 3.0.
4.1 Standard Construction Methods (Figures CS, OCR, R1A, R1B, WS) Construction of a gas pipeline consists of distinct phases: clearing, grading, ditching, lowering-in, backfilling, hydrostatic testing and restoration as shown in Figure CS. The construction methods described will be used in conjunction with the special methods described in Section 5.0 and Section 6.0. Tennessee will work with appropriate agencies and landowners to prevent the spread of noxious weeds and pests. Figures R1A and R1B show the typical ROW configurations where construction activities will take place.
Although primarily the responsibility of the EI, all inspectors are responsible to regularly inspect and assess the condition of the erosion and sediment control devices employed on the ROW during construction. The EI will inspect all disturbed areas of the construction spread(s) (e.g., construction ROW, pipe storage yards, temporary contractor yards, etc.) that have not been permanently stabilized: 1) on a daily basis in areas of active construction or equipment operation; 2) on a weekly basis in areas with no construction or equipment operation; and, 3) within 24 hours of the end of a storm event that is 0.5 inches or greater.
Where portions of the ROW have been permanently stabilized, these portions will be inspected by the EI periodically and/or within 24 hours of a storm event that is 0.5 inches or greater while construction is ongoing. Once construction is complete, inspections to assess the condition of the erosion and sediment control devices will be performed periodically by Tennessee personnel until the Commission and/or other permitting agencies determines that the entire ROW is permanently revegetated.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-2
June 2010
4.1.1 Clearing The following are standard procedures that Tennessee will follow during the clearing phase of construction:
• ROW boundaries (e.g., workspace limits) will be clearly delineated and the Clearing Inspector will ensure that no clearing occurs beyond these boundaries.
• Wetland boundaries shall be clearly marked prior to clearing.
• Trees to be saved shall be marked (flagging, construction fencing, etc.) before clearing begins.
• The construction corridor will be cleared and graded to remove brush, trees, roots and other obstructions such as large rocks and stumps. Non-woody vegetation may be mowed to ground level.
• All existing fences needing to be temporarily removed for access shall be maintained by the use of a temporary fence section (gap). Prior to being cut, the fence will be properly braced and similar material used to construct the gap. At no time will an unattended gap be left open. The gap will be replaced after cleanup with a permanent fence of the same or similar material and condition.
• When pruning is necessary to clear the ROW, pruning cuts shall be made as follows:
1. cuts should be smooth;
2. branch collars shall not be cut (i.e., cuts should be made immediately in front of the branch collar);
3. large, heavy branches shall be precut on the underside to prevent splitting or peeling of bark; and
4. climbing spurs shall not be used.
• Trees shall be felled into the ROW.
• Trees that have fallen into waterbodies or beyond the ROW shall be removed immediately.
• Trees located outside of the ROW will not be cut to obtain timber for use along the ROW.
• Access within the ROW across wetlands will only be permitted where soils are non-saturated and able to support construction equipment without rutting of the wetland soil at the time of crossing, during frozen soil conditions or with the use of timber mats to avoid rutting of the wetland soil. The EI will determine if access within the ROW across wetlands will be permitted based on soil conditions and/or the use of timber mats.
4.1.1.1 Useable Timber
• Should individual landowners wish to utilize the trees cleared from the ROW, the timber will be left in tree length and will be neatly stacked at the edge of the ROW in areas identified by the Environmental Inspector (“EI”) prior to the commencement of clearing activities and directly accessible to the landowner in accordance with individual landowner agreements.
• Timber shall only be stacked along the ROW at the specific request of a landowner, under the condition that it is in an already cleared upland area that will be accessible to the landowner without disturbing the restored right of way.
• Timber not designated for other uses will be disposed of by the Tennessee’s contractor, as designated by the LEI or contract agreement.
• Timber shall not be stacked in drainage ways or left within wetlands.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-3
June 2010
• Tennessee does not plan to use timber stacks as wildlife habitat.
4.1.1.2 Trees and Brush Disposal
Trees and brush shall be disposed of in one or more of the following ways depending on local restrictions, applicable permit stipulations and/or as designated by the LEI:
Brush Piles
• Brush will be piled at the edge of the ROW to provide filter strips or wildlife habitat.
• Wildlife brush piles shall be a maximum of 12 feet wide and compacted to 4 feet high with breaks at a minimum of 100 to 200 feet.
• All brush will be removed from wetland areas.
Chipping
• Chips can be left on the ROW, with LEI approval, if it does not inhibit revegetation. Chips left on the ROW will require fertilizer application during restoration as specified in Section 4.1.6.
• Chips will not be left in agricultural lands, wetlands or within 50 feet of wetlands. Chips will not be stockpiled in such a manner that they may be transported into a wetland or agricultural land.
Off Site Disposal
• Shall be done when brush piles or chipping are not permitted or appropriate.
• Disposal shall be at an approved landfill or other site which is traditionally used for disposal of construction/timber debris. Off-site disposal can be subject to compliance with all applicable survey, landowner permissions, and mitigation requirements.
• No material will be stacked outside of the construction workspace boundaries. Tennessee will obtain written agreements from landowners who receive any timber. The landowner will agree to accept responsibility for the timber and will not place it in a wetland. The timber will be delivered to the landowner (previously disturbed areas) via public ROWs or placed at the edge of the construction ROW for retrieval.
4.1.2 Grading (Figures R5A, R5B) When existing topography and/or terrain does not permit crews and equipment to operate safely and does not provide access or an efficient work area, grading shall be required. Rock construction entrances shall be installed where required prior to grading. Erosion control devices must also be installed at all stream, wetland, and road crossings prior to grading. Only the minimal clearing and grading necessary to install the devices shall be allowed. The following general construction methods will be employed during grading:
4.1.2.1 Removal of Tree Stumps
• In upland areas, stumps can be removed across the entire width of the construction ROW if required for pipeline safety reasons or for worker safety concerns.
• In wetlands, stumps shall be removed only in the trenchline; except where construction constraints or safety concerns require their removal.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-4
June 2010
4.1.2.2 Disposal of Tree Stumps
Tree stumps shall be disposed of by one of the following methods, pending approval of the landowner, the LEI and in accordance with permit and regulatory requirements:
• Stumps may be removed from the site and disposed of in an approved landfill or other site which traditionally accepts construction/timber debris.
• Stumps may be chipped in upland areas provided that fertilizer is applied during restoration.
• Stumps may be ground in wetlands; however, grindings will be removed from the wetlands to the maximum extent practicable.
4.1.2.3 Rock Disposal
Excess rock is defined as all rock that cannot be returned to the existing rock profile in the trench or graded cuts or is not needed to restore the right of way surface to a condition comparable to that found adjacent to the right of way. Excess Rock, including blast rock, shall be used or disposed of by one or more of the following ways:
• Excess rock shall be removed from at least the top 12 inches of soil to the extent practicable in agricultural areas, hayfields, pastures, residential areas, and other areas at the landowners request. Except where landowner agreements specify otherwise, the size, density, and distribution of rock on the construction work area should typically be similar to adjacent areas not disturbed by construction.
• Windrowed in uplands per landowner agreement and applicable permits or removed if it exceeds that of the surrounding terrain.
• Hauled to landowner property (previously disturbed areas) per landowner agreement. As part of the agreement, the landowner will accept responsibility for the rock, and not place it in a wetland area.
• Removed and disposed at an approved site which is traditionally used for rock debris disposal.
• Used as riprap for stream bank stabilization where allowed by applicable permits.
• Used to construct stonewalls or fences, if approved by Tennessee per landowner agreement.
• Used to improve designated construction access roads, if approved by the appropriate agencies and Tennessee per landowner agreement(s).
4.1.2.4 Water Bars/Terraces (Slope Breakers) (Figure SB)
• Water bars/terraces shall be installed diagonally across the ROW on slopes, except in cultivated areas and lawns, to control erosion by reducing and shortening the length and concentration of runoff.
• Water bars shall be installed on both sides of waterbody and wetland crossings, and upslope of all roadway and railroad crossings, unless in areas where percent slope is <5 percent.
• Soil will be slightly excavated and compacted to form a temporary channel with an adjacent downslope berm or ridge of compacted soil.
• The degree of slope, soil characteristics, runoff area and location of suitable outlets determines the number and shape of water bars required. The minimum guidelines for water bar spacing based upon the Commission’s standards are:
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-5
June 2010
Slope % FERC Spacing < 5 None
5 – 15 300 feet apart >15 – 30 200 feet apart
> 30 100 feet apart a: Permanent waterbars are required at all stream, river, and other waterbody crossings as well as upslope from roadway and railroad cut slopes. Otherwise not required .
• The minimum guidelines for water bar spacing based upon the NJ DEP’s standards are:
Slope % NJ DEP Spacing 1 400 2 245 feet apart 5 125 feet apart 10 78 feet apart 15 58 feet apart 20 47 feet apart 25 40 feet apart 30 35 feet apart
• The bar/terrace shall permit traffic to move over it safely without easily destroying it.
• Water bars/terraces shall be maintained and repaired at the end of each day.
• Water bars/terraces shall divert water to a well-vegetated area. If a vegetated area is unavailable, erosion control barriers shall be installed to filter the runoff just off of the construction ROW at the outlet of the water bar.
• Silt fence, hay/straw bales, or sandbags may be used in place of water bars/terraces at the discretion of the EI.
4.1.2.5 Temporary Erosion Control Barriers
Hay/straw bales and silt fences are interchangeable, except where noted below. Temporary erosion control barriers are required immediately after the initial disturbance of the soil, as described below.
• At the outlet of a water bar when vegetation is not adequate to control erosion.
• Along banks of waterbodies between the graded construction ROW and waterbody after clearing and before grading.
• Downslope of any stockpiled soil in the vicinity of waterbodies and wetlands.
• At the base of slopes adjacent to road and railroad crossings until disturbed vegetation has been re-established.
• At sideslope and downslope boundaries of the construction area where run-off is not otherwise directed by a water bar/terrace.
• Maintained throughout construction and remain in place until permanent revegetation has been judged successful, upon which they will be removed.
• Within the construction ROW at boundaries between wetlands and adjacent disturbed upland areas.
• As necessary to prevent siltation of ponds, wetlands, or other waterbodies adjacent to/downslope of the construction ROW.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-6
June 2010
• At the edge of the construction ROW as needed to contain spoil and sediment.
• To be inspected on a daily basis in areas of active construction or equipment operation, on a weekly basis in areas with no construction or equipment operation, and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event that is 0.5 inches or greater. Repairs will be made as soon as possible after a problem, if any, is noted. Any excess sediment will be re-incorporated into the site.
• Sediment shall be removed when accumulation reaches 1/2 the above-ground height of the barrier.
4.1.2.6 Silt Fence Installation and Maintenance (Figure SF1)
• Accumulated sediment shall be removed when accumulation reaches 1/2 the above-ground height of the barrier and the fence inspected to ensure it remains imbedded.
• A sufficient stockpile of silt fence shall be maintained on site for emergency use.
4.1.2.7 Hay/Straw Bale Installation and Maintenance (Figure ST1)
• Shall be anchored in place with two stakes.
• Stakes shall be sized appropriately.
• Bindings on bales shall be horizontal.
• Bales shall be repaired if damaged or if water is channeling underneath bales.
• Damaged bales shall be replaced with new bales as deemed necessary by the EI.
• A sufficient supply of bales shall be maintained on site for emergency use.
• Bales with baling wire shall not be used.
4.1.3 Ditching
4.1.3.1 Topsoil Segregation (Figures R2A, R2B, R3A, R3B, R4A, R4B)
Topsoil is required to be segregated in wetlands as part of the ditching procedure, unless the soil is saturated, there is standing water present, or in freezing conditions. Unless approved otherwise by the landowner or land management agency, topsoil is segregated prior to ditching (see Section 5.10 and Section 5.12 of this ECP, respectively) in all residential areas (or by option, may be imported), in actively cultivated or rotated croplands and pastures, hayfields and other areas at the landowners or land managing agency’s request.
• Topsoil and subsoil will be segregated during ditching and stockpiled separately.
• Topsoil is removed to its actual depth or to a maximum depth of 12 inches, as determined by the EI.
• Topsoil shall not be used for padding, backfill or trench breakers, under any circumstances.
4.1.3.2 Underground Utilities (Figures CO, FPC)
• Shall be located in coordination with the Contractor, Tennessee, utility companies and landowners, and carefully exposed by the Contractor.
• Appropriate authorities (such as the One Call/Dig Safe systems) must be notified. The One Call system shall be contacted a minimum of 2 weeks prior to construction in New Jersey (800.272.1000).
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-7
June 2010
4.1.3.3 Temporary Trench Breakers
Soft plugs consist of compacted subsoil or sandbags placed in the ditch following excavation. Topsoil will not be used for plugs. Hard plugs consist of unexcavated portions of the ditch and also typically provide access across the ditch for wildlife and livestock.
• Trench breakers will be installed at both sides of all waterbody and wetland crossings.
• Soft plugs constructed to hold water will be longer along the trenchline than they are tall, constructed in compacted layers, and inspected regularly by the Contractor to prevent breaching.
• Installation of trench breakers and soft plugs will be coordinated with installation of temporary water bars (Figure SB) in order to effectively divert water off the ROW (see table below).
Slope % FERC Spacing Slope % < 5 None < 5
5 – 15 300 feet apart 5 – 15 >15 – 30 200 feet apart 15 – 25
> 30 100 feet apart 25 – 35 35 – 100 > 100
a: Trench plugs are required at all stream, river, and other waterbody crossings regardless of trench slope to avoid draining a waterbody or wetland. Otherwise not required.
• Water accumulated behind the plugs will be pumped out onto a well-vegetated area or filtered before the plug is removed in accordance with Section 4.1.4. Sediment shall be removed and redistributed within the trench upslope of the trench breaker when accumulations reach 1/2 the height of the barrier.
4.1.4 Lowering In / Backfilling
The following standard techniques will be used during lowering-in and backfilling:
4.1.4.1 Trench Dewatering (Figure ED1, FB)
• Hose intakes will be elevated off of the ditch bottom.
• Dewater locations will be approved by the EI.
• Discharges:
a. If greater than 100 feet from a wetland or stream bank, the discharge will be directed into a well vegetated area; or
b. If no well vegetated area is available or the discharge point is less than 100 feet from a wetland or stream bank, the discharge will be directed through a filter bag and/or into areas contained by erosion control barriers. Filter bags will be used in accordance with manufacturers’ specifications.
Under no circumstances will trench water or other forms of turbid water be directly discharged onto exposed soil or into any wetland or waterbody, known cultural resource sites, or locations of sensitive species.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-8
June 2010
4.1.4.2 Padding
• Used so that rock, gravel or other materials do not damage the pipe coating.
• Is a layer of rock-free (less than 1.5 inch dia.) subsoil or sand placed around the pipe.
• Topsoil will not be used as padding.
• Rocks up to six (6) inches may be placed adjacent to the pipeline if a rock jacket is used.
• In the case of insufficient padding materials available on-site due to subsoil conditions, additional padding will be imported from sources approved by Tennessee.
4.1.4.3 Permanent Trench Breakers (Figure TB1, TB2)
• Permanently installed in the ditch prior to backfilling.
• Consist of sandbags, earth-filled sacks or other approved materials.
• Topsoil shall not be used to fill the sacks.
• Must be a minimum of 2 sacks wide.
• Installed as required in agricultural fields and residential areas and at the base of slopes greater than 5 percent where the base of the slope is less than 50 feet from a waterbody or wetland and where needed to avoid draining a wetland. For each wetland crossed, a trench breaker will be installed at the base of slopes near the boundary between the wetland and adjacent upland areas.
• Installed at the same spacing as permanent slope breakers in agricultural fields and residential areas
• In large wetlands, installed at intervals within the wetlands as needed to avoid draining a wetland, as determined by the EI, LEI or other qualified professional.
4.1.4.4 Backfilling
• Backfill material and methods will be approved by the assigned inspector.
• Subsoil shall be placed directly onto the padding material.
• Excavated and blast rock may be used as backfill above the layer of padding in agricultural, wetland, and residential areas, up to the existing level of bedrock. Stones larger than 4 inches will typically not be used in the top 12 inches (topsoil layer) in all rotated and permanent cropland, hayfields, improved pastures, residential areas, and other areas at the landowners request. The landowner may approve other rock size provisions in writing.
• Heavy equipment may be used to compact the backfilled ditch to minimize settling, or a crown of soil will be put over the pipeline to compensate for future soil settling. Openings shall be left in the crown to allow for lateral surface drainage.
• Any excess excavated materials or materials unsuitable for backfill will be handled, as approved by landowner or land management agency, or disposed of in accordance with applicable regulations
• Disposal of excess blast rock shall be performed in accordance with Section 4.1.2.3 (Rock Disposal).
• Cover depths are identified in the table below:
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-9
June 2010
Condition Class Depth of Cover (inches)
Typical - 36 Non-Typical (e.g., agricultural lands,
wetlands, bedrock Class1 30” soil, 18” rock
Class 2, 3, 4 – 36 36” soil, 24” rock Drainage ditches of public roads or
Railroad Crossings - 36” soil, 24” rock
Navigable river, stream, harbor - 48”soil, 24”rock Minor stream crossing - 36”soil, 24”rock
Offshore - 36” Source: MES Sec.500 Cover and Clearance
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-10
June 2010
4.1.5 Hydrostatic Testing (Figure ED2) Hydrostatic testing verifies the integrity of pipeline segments. Integrity is tested by capping pipeline segments with test manifolds and filling the capped segments with water. The water is then pressurized and held for 8 hours (4 hours for pre-tested, pre-fabricated units or short visible sections). Any significant loss of pressure indicates that a leak may have occurred. The source of the water used for testing is typically local streams, rivers, or potable water supply systems (see Section 6). Hydrostatic testing of the piping will be performed in one or more sections, depending upon the length of piping and/or elevation of the local terrain. All hydrostatic testing activities will be performed in compliance with appropriate permit requirements.
Environmental impacts associated with the withdrawal and discharge of test water shall be minimized by:
• Submitting an administratively complete Clean Water Assurance Form for coverage under the NPDES General Permit (NJG0132993) for hydrostatic testwater discharges at least 14 days prior to discharge for testing in New Jersey.
• Obtaining a Water Allocation Permit from New Jersey Department of Environmental Protection (“NJ DEP”), if required (>100,000 gallons/day of water withdrawal).
• Using state-designated exceptional value waters, waterbodies which provide habitat for federally listed threatened or endangered species or waterbodies designated as public water supplies only upon written permission from the appropriate Federal, state and/or local permitting agencies.
• Performing inspection of all welds or hydrostatic testing the pipeline sections before HDD installation under waterbodies or wetlands.
• Locating hydrostatic test manifolds outside of wetlands and riparian areas as practical.
• Withdrawing from and discharging to water sources shall comply with appropriate agency requirements which consider the protection of fisheries resources on a case-by-case basis.
• Complying with all appropriate permit requirements. Water samples (grab) shall be taken at the beginning and end of the discharge period for a minimum of 2 sampling events.
• Screening the intake to avoid entrainment of fish.
• Maintaining adequate stream flow rates to protect aquatic life, provide for all waterbody uses, and downstream withdrawals of water by existing users.
• Anchoring the discharge pipe for safety.
• Discharging test water to a suitable receiving body of water, across a well-vegetated area or filtered through a filter bag or erosion control barriers.
• Discharging test water against a splash plate or other energy dissipating device approved by the EI in order to aerate, slow, and disperse the flow (Figure ED2).
• Controlling the rate of discharge at a level that appropriately prevents flooding or erosion.
• Not allowed to discharge into state-designated exceptional value waters, waterbodies which provide habitat for federally listed threatened or endangered species, or waterbodies designated as public water supplies without written permission from the appropriate Federal, state and local permitting agencies.
• Coordinating hydrostatic test water withdrawal and discharge activities with the EI, the Tennessee Division Environmental Coordinator (“DEC”), Houston Environmental Coordinator (“EC”) and NJ DEP.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-11
June 2010
4.1.6 Restoration and Revegetation Restoration and revegetation of the ROW incorporates permanent erosion and sediment control measures. However, in the event that final restoration cannot occur in a timely manner due to weather or soil conditions, temporary erosion and sediment control measures will be maintained until the weather is suitable for final cleanup and revegetation. In no case shall final cleanup be delayed beyond the end of the next recommended seeding season.
4.1.6.1 Temporary Erosion Control
• Stabilization measures shall be initiated as soon as practical on upland portions of the ROW where activities have temporarily or permanently ceased except when the initiation of stabilization measures by the seventh day is precluded by weather. Stabilization measures shall be initiated as soon as machinery is able to obtain access to the ROW.
• Stabilization of waterbodies and wetlands shall be initiated immediately after backfilling, weather permitting.
• If construction is completed more than 20 days before the perennial vegetation seeding season, the construction work area shall be mulched with 3 tons/acre of straw, or its equivalent (Refer to Tables 9.2-1 through 9.2-5).
• Temporary plantings will be fertilized in accordance with Tables 9.2-3 and 9.2-4 in New Jersey.
• All temporary sediment barriers will be removed when an area is successfully revegetated (i.e., when the ROW surface condition is similar to adjacent undisturbed lands), or when permanent erosion controls are installed.
4.1.6.2 Permanent Restoration Measures
• Permanent restoration of waterbodies and wetlands shall be initiated immediately after backfilling, weather permitting.
• Final grading shall be completed, including topsoil replacement and permanent erosion control measures, within 20 days after backfilling the trench (10 day in residential areas), weather permitting. Table 9.2-5 provides seeding and fertilizer application rates for permanent restoration in New Jersey, respectively.
• Construction debris shall be removed from the ROW and the ROW shall be graded so that the soil is left in the proper condition for planting.
• Where trench compaction has not been done, the ROW shall be graded to pre-construction contours, as practical, with a small crown of soil left over the ditch (except in waterbodies) to compensate for settling, but not to interfere with natural drainage.
• Where topsoil has been segregated, the topsoil shall be spread back along the ROW in an even layer.
• All fences which were cut and replaced by gaps during construction shall be repaired to at least the equivalent preconstruction conditions.
• Permanent water bars shall be constructed to the same specifications as temporary water bars after final grading and prior to seeding.
• Permanent water bars will be constructed to replace temporary erosion control barriers upslope of road and railroad crossings, and on both sides of all wetland and waterbody crossings, where appropriate.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-12
June 2010
• Within 30 days of the in-service date, the Tennessee/Contractor/EI will prepare a summary report identifying:
a. quantity and type of fertilizer, seed and mulch used for each pipeline segment;
b. the amount of lime applied (if required);
c. the equipment used to implement this process;
d. the acreage treated;
e. the dates of backfilling and seeding;
f. the number of landowners specifying other seeding requirements and a description of the requirements;
g. and any problem areas, and how they were addressed.
4.1.6.3 Revegetation and Seeding
• The ROW shall be limed, fertilized, seeded, and mulched in accordance with the specific requirements listed in Tables 9.2-1 through 9.2-5, unless otherwise requested by the landowner. Fertilizer, lime and mulch will not be used within wetlands unless required in writing by the appropriate land management or state agency. Straw mulch will be applied to wetlands in accordance with state requirements in Tables 9.2-1 through 9.2-5. Where possible, lime and fertilizer will be incorporated into the top 2 inches of soil. If seeding cannot be done within the recommended seeding dates, temporary erosion and sediment controls shall be used and seeding of permanent cover shall be done at the beginning of the next growing season.
• The ROW will be seeded within 20 working days (10 days in residential areas) of final grading in accordance with recommended seeding dates, weather and soil conditions permitting.
• Turf, ornamental shrubs and other landscaping materials shall be restored in accordance with landowner agreements.
• Where broadcast or hydro-seeding is to be done, the seedbed will be scarified to ensure sites for seeds to lodge and germinate.
• Where hand broadcast seeding is used, the seed shall be applied at one-half the rate in each of two separate passes. The passes will be made perpendicular to each other to ensure complete and uniform coverage.
• The seedbed will be prepared to depth of 3 to 4 inches using appropriate equipment to provide a firm, smooth seedbed, free of debris.
• Slopes steeper than 3:1 shall be stabilized immediately after final grading in accordance with recommended seeding dates, weather permitting.
• Seed shall be purchased in accordance with the Pure Live Seed (“PLS”) specifications for seed mixes and used within 12 months of testing.
• Legume seed will be treated with a species-specific inoculant per manufacturer’s specifications.
• The seed shall be applied and covered uniformly per local soil conservation authoritie’s recommendations, depending on seed size. A seed drill equipped with a cultipacker is preferred, but broadcast or hydro-seeding can be used at double the recommended seeding rates. Where broadcast seeding is used, the seedbed shall be firmed after seeding.
• Other alternative seed mixes specifically requested by the landowner or land-managing agency may be used (see alignment sheets and line list).
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-13
June 2010
• A travel lane may be left open temporarily to allow access by construction traffic if the temporary erosion control structures are installed, inspected and maintained as specified. When access is no longer required, the travel lane shall be removed, decompaction of the travel lane will occur, and the travel lane restored as indicated in Section 5.10.3.
4.1.6.4 Forested Wetland Restoration
• The approach to wetland mitigation and restoration involves a combination of impact minimization during construction, substrate and hydrology restoration, and vegetation establishment involving natural, successional processes as a key component. Tennessee believes that this approach will best minimize the long-term impacts to forested wetlands and facilitate the development of a forested wetland with a vegetation community composed of species best suited for the site and successional stage.
• During the construction phase, impacts to wetlands will be minimized by employing the wetland construction procedures specified in this ECP. In forested wetlands, Tennessee will minimize the amount of tree clearing to the maximum extent practicable while still allowing for safe construction of the pipeline. Although Tennessee has requested a 75-foot construction ROW through all wetlands, where possible as determined by the EIs and LEIs, selected trees along the edge of the various corridors may be preserved to help minimize impacts. In forested and scrub-shrub wetlands, trees and brush will be cut and/or ground just above or to ground level, leaving the stumps and root systems intact. Tree stumps will be preserved to the maximum extent practicable and removed only over the trenchline and where the EIs and LEIs determine the stumps present a safety hazard for construction. Stumps requiring removal in the construction zone will typically be ground down to ground level, leaving some of the root collar and root system in place. Treating stumps and root systems in this manner will promote the potential for resprouting in some species.
• During the restoration phase, segregated topsoil will be replaced over the trenchline and wetland contours and drainage patterns will be restored to approximate original condition. If necessary, surface rock and boulders that had been windrowed during the construction phase will be distributed in a more natural configuration in the temporary workspace. Following restoration of the substrate, wetlands shall be seeded and/or mulched according to Tables 9.2-1 and 9.2-3 to stabilize the area until indigenous wetland species can re-establish themselves. Annual ryegrass shall not be placed into any wetlands in Bradford, County, PA or in other wetland areas where standing water is present.
• Re-establishment of forest and shrub vegetation in forested wetlands will be performed using a combination of plantings and natural, successional processes. As required by this ECP, Tennessee will conduct post-construction monitoring of all wetlands affected by construction to access the condition of vegetation and the success of restoration. As a component of the monitoring program, Tennessee will perform quantitative sampling to determine the type and quantity of tree and shrub species naturally colonizing and resprouting in the construction ROW. At the end of the second growing season, the results of the field monitoring will be compared to pre-determined threshold success criteria, if any, developed in consultation with the permitting agencies. These success criteria will identify quantities of native woody species that would be considered necessary to ensure successful forested wetland restoration. If actual field stem counts fall short of the pre-determined threshold values, Tennessee will develop supplemental plans in conjunction with the appropriate state and federal agencies.
• The species to be included in the supplemental replanting plan will be based on those identified to be naturally colonizing and succeeding on the various construction sites. By mimicking natural processes and site ecology, and planting appropriate species at the appropriate successional stage, efforts to promote restoration of forested and scrub-shrub wetlands will be maximized. Through post-construction monitoring, the site will dictate which species will be better suited for supplemental planting, and effort and cost will not be wasted planting species maladapted to the site conditions.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-14
June 2010
• Specifications for species, planting stock size and quality, stem quantity and spacing, and planting method will be developed for review by appropriate agency personnel. Implementation of the supplemental planting program, if necessary, will occur during the spring following the end of the second growing season.
4.1.6.5 Mulching
• Where seeding is permitted, mulch will be applied according to tables 9.2-1 and 9.2-3 on the entire ROW except lawns, agricultural (crop) areas, and upland areas where hydro-mulch is used.
• If construction or restoration activity is interrupted for extended periods (more than 20 days), mulch will be applied before seeding.
• If mulching before seeding, mulch application will be increased on all slopes within 100 feet of waterbodies and wetlands to a rate of 3 tons/acre.
• Up to 1 ton/acre of wood chips may be added to mulch if areas are top-dressed with 11 pounds/acre of available nitrogen, 50% of which must be slow release.
• If a mulch blower is used, the strands of the mulching material shall be at least 8 inches long to allow anchoring.
• Mulch shall be anchored immediately after placement on steep slopes and stream banks. Slopes that are too steep for crimping with tracked equipment or a mulch anchoring tool (i.e., slopes >15%) will be anchored manually by the use of matting or netting.
• When mechanically anchoring mulch, a mulch anchoring tool or tracked equipment will be used to crimp the mulch to a depth of 2 to 3 inches.
• When anchoring with liquid mulch binders, use rates recommended by the manufacturer. Liquid mulch binders will not be used within 100 feet of wetlands or waterbodies.
4.1.6.6 Matting/Netting/Erosion Control Fabric (Figure CF1, CF2)
• Matting or netting consists of jute, wood excelsior, or similar materials, and is used to anchor mulch and stabilize the surface of the soil during the critical period of vegetative establishment, as directed by the EI. Typical specifications are included in Figure CF1 and CF2; however specific manufacturer’s installation instructions should be followed to ensure proper performance of the product.
• Matting or netting will be applied to critical, sensitive areas (i.e., steep slopes [typically slopes >15%], banks of waterbodies, bar ditches, etc.), as specified by the EI. Matting or netting will also be applied to any areas where temporary/permanent vegetation is not taking/working to assist is protecting the seed bank.
• Matting or netting will be anchored with pegs or staples.
4.1.6.7 Monitoring
• Tennessee will file with the Commission quarterly activity reports documenting problems including those identified by the landowner, and corrective actions taken for 2 years following construction (3 years for wetland areas).
• Tennessee will conduct follow-up inspections after the first and second growing season after seeding to determine the success of revegetation. Revegetation will be considered successful if non-nuisance vegetation is similar in density to adjacent undisturbed lands, based on representative random sampling in the field (e.g., visual survey). If vegetative cover is not successful or if there is a need for noxious weed
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-15
June 2010
control measures, an experienced agronomist shall be used to determine the need for additional restoration measures.
• Tennessee will use one or more of the following measures in cooperation with the landowner, if warranted or required, to control off-road vehicles:
a. posting, as necessary, appropriate signage;
b. installing a locking gate with fencing to prevent bypassing the gate;
c. in extremely sensitive areas, planting conifers or other appropriate shallow-rooted trees and/or shrubs across the ROW except where access is required for Tennessee’s use. The spacing of trees and/or shrubs and length of ROW planted will make a reasonable effort to prevent unauthorized vehicle access and screen the ROW from view. A gate may be used in conjunction with the screening. This method will be used only when reflected on site-specific plans or other specifications; or
d. installing a barrier across the ROW consisting of slash and timber, piping, a line of boulders or a combination thereof.
• Signs, gates, and marker posts shall be maintained as necessary.
4.2 Safety • Temporary safety fences shall be erected at ROW crossings (e.g., residential areas, sensitive environmental
areas, road crossings, etc.) where necessary.
• The length of time the ditch is left open shall be minimized through coordination by the LEI with the construction Contractor.
• Soil tracked onto roads by construction equipment shall be minimized and will be cleaned in a manner consistent with all applicable permits. If stone access pads are used in residential or active agricultural areas, synthetic fabric will be used to facilitate removal.
• Tennessee may use flagmen for traffic control, temporary traffic detours and/or off-site parking facilities and busing for work crews.
• Erosion control devices will be installed at the base of slopes adjacent to roads.
4.3 Access Roads (Figure ACR) • If an existing public road is used, the Contractor shall notify the appropriate agency or department of the
intent to haul oversize loads over the road.
• The Contractor will not make any arrangements with landowners to use, change, or improve private access roads or property beyond those specified on the drawings or designated in the landowner agreement.
• New access roads shall not be located adjacent to waterbodies or wetlands except where conditions warrant and only if approved by the appropriate local, state, or federal agency.
• For temporary access through wetlands, matting will be left in place for that specific purpose where approved. Once temporary access is no longer necessary, all matting will be completely removed and the wetland restored as indicated in Section 5.11.1.
• If side ditches are required to provide drainage, they shall be excavated parallel to the road to conduct runoff away from the road.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-16
June 2010
• Access roads across a waterbody must use an equipment bridge. Equipment bridges will be maintained to prevent soil from entering the waterbody.
• Where an access road crosses an intermittent drain, culverts will be installed where necessary to maintain existing drainage patterns, and clean stone/rock will be used to improve access roads where necessary for stabilization and/or rutting protection.
• Stream channels shall not be altered permanently for installation of equipment bridges.
• Access roads will be restored to pre-construction conditions unless specified by the landowner and approved by applicable permits.
• If subsoils are unstable, corduroy paths may be needed. These materials will be removed during clean-up.
• Erosion control barriers will be installed at the edge of access roads where necessary to prevent siltation of ponds, wetlands of other adjacent/downslope waterbodies.
4.3.1 Road Entrance/Exit Protection (Figure RC)
• Construction entrances comprised of rock (>2-inch diameter), mats, or other approved material, shall be located at all public, paved roadway crossings, as needed.
• Construction entrance and exit locations shall be constructed to the minimum width, length, and thickness dimensions, as appropriate, considering existing topography, change in road edge height, existing soil geography including compaction characteristic, right-of-way constraints, etc. A typical rock construction entrance is shown in Figure RC.
• For clayey or poorly drained soils and in agricultural land, a geotextile fabric underlayment, of a type recommended for such applications by the manufacturer, will be used.
• An appropriate minimum rock thickness shall be maintained throughout construction. A stockpile of rock shall be maintained on the construction site for this purpose.
• All sediment deposited on public roadways will be removed and returned to the construction site at the end of each construction day. Washing of the roadway with water or sweeping sediment deposits into roadway ditches, sewers, culverts, or other drainageways is not permitted.
4.4 Pipe Yards • Up to 12 inches of topsoil will be stripped and segregated in agricultural lands used as pipe yards or as per
landowner agreement.
• Appropriate erosion control measures will be incorporated in pipe yards.
• All disturbed pipe yard areas will be restored and revegetated, as necessary, or as per landowner agreement.
4.5 Inadvertent Disturbance Off Right-Of-Way Tennessee will work to restrict all activities to the permitted construction ROW. However, under extreme circumstances, such as while working on steep slopes in slippery conditions, and while grading on steep side hills, some inadvertent off-ROW disturbance may occur. In the event that inadvertent off-ROW disturbance occurs, the following procedures will be implemented:
• The operator or foreman will immediately report the occurrence to a Tennessee Inspector, who will notify the LEI and EI. The EI will then notify the appropriate Tennessee personnel.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 4-17
June 2010
• The conditions which caused the disturbance will be evaluated, and the LEI and EI will determine whether work at the site can continue under those conditions.
• The nature of the off-ROW disturbance will be evaluated and corrective actions taken as deemed necessary by the LEI and EI. Such measures may include immediate recontouring and seeding of the disturbed site, and/or installation of erosion control devices to contain the disturbance.
• Tennessee will notify the appropriate landowner of the disturbance. Tennessee will notify the FERC of the disturbance within 24 hours and will include a write-up of the disturbance in required construction reports.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-18
June 2010
5.0 Specialized Construction Methods
Tennessee uses specialized construction techniques in certain areas. Site-specific construction information is discussed in Section 6.0.
5.1 Blasting Installing the pipeline may require blasting in some areas, such as those with rock outcrops. During blasting, Contractors will adhere to the stand-alone Blasting Plan to be developed for the Project by Tennessee prior to construction. Implementation of the Blasting Plan during construction will be subject to approval by the Commission and will enhance safety, and minimize damage to adjacent areas and structures. A brief summary of the precautions to be contained in the Blasting Plan include:
• installing blasting mats in congested areas, in shallow waterbodies, or near structures that could be damaged by fly-rock;
• posting warning signals, flags, and barricades;
• following procedures for safe storage, handling, loading, firing, and disposal of explosive materials; and
• manning adjacent pipelines at valves for emergency response.
These blasting standards meet or exceed all applicable federal, state, and local requirements covering the use of explosives. Excessive vibration will be controlled by limiting the size of charges and by using charge delays, which stagger each charge in a series of explosions.
If blasting near structures, an independent Contractor will inspect structures prior to blasting within about 150 feet of the construction work area, locations requested by the pipeline Contractor, and at the request of an affected landowner. Post-blast inspections will be performed as warranted. Blasting will be performed by registered blasters and monitored by blasting inspectors. During blasting, the Contractor will monitor ground vibrations at the nearest structure (or well) within 150 feet of the construction work area.
If blasting within 150 feet of any identified water well(s), it/they will be inspected for water quality and flow characteristics with the owner’s permission both before and after blasting except in congested areas, where the nearest two or three wells or structures will be monitored. This testing shall be conducted by a qualified independent inspection service and shall include tests of water quality and in the case of shallow dug wells or springs, sufficient analysis on quantity to determine if pipeline construction has created an impact. Tennessee is researching available public data bases and has inquired of the affected landowners to determine the location of public and private water supplies (wells). In the event where it is determined that permanent impacts have occurred to a well, Tennessee shall repair or replace the well, to as near pre-construction condition as possible.
Tennessee will evaluate any damage complaints associated with construction activities, including blasting. In the unlikely event that blasting activities temporarily impair well water, Tennessee will provide alternative sources of water or otherwise compensate the owner. If well damage is substantiated, Tennessee will either compensate the owner for damages or arrange for a new well to be drilled. In the unlikely event that structural damage occurs at a nearby structure as a result of construction activities, the owner will be compensated for damages or appropriate repairs will be made.
If blasting in a wetland or waterbody, permits will be secured from all applicable federal, state and local agencies.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-19
June 2010
Topsoil in the ditchline will be segregated prior to blasting in wetlands. Rock from the trench will be stored with subsoil material. To limit equipment operating in wetlands and to avoid the import of replacement fill, rock will not be removed from the wetland but will be returned to the trench as subsoil. Surface rock should not exceed pre-construction conditions as documented by the EI.
Excess rock is defined as all rock that cannot be returned to the existing rock profile in the trench or graded cuts or is not needed to restore the right of way surface to a condition comparable to that found adjacent to the right of way. Excess rock will be hauled off the ROW and disposed of at an approved landfill or recycling facility unless approved for use as slope stabilization or for some other use on the construction work areas as approved by the landowner or land managing agency.
5.2 The Two-Tone Approach (Figures R5A, R5B) Rugged topography is present along portions of several loop sections (see Table 5.3-1 below and Resource Report 6 of Tennessee’s Environmental Report for specific locations of shallow depth to bedrock). Permanent trench breakers consisting of sandbags or foam (though gravel or cement filled sacks may also be used) will be installed in the ditch over and around the pipe in areas of slope with high erosion potential. Trench breakers will be used to isolate wet areas and to minimize channeling of groundwater along the ditch line.
When working in areas with normal topography, the surface of the working side of the ROW is usually leveled at a grade equal to the elevation of the top of the ditch. This facilitates the safe passage of equipment and installation of the pipe. In areas along the ROW where steep, rugged topography is encountered, two tone cut and fill construction methods will be utilized for equipment and/or personnel safety considerations. The tone closest to the ditch is used for construction, while the tone farthest from the ditch is used for travel. The height of the construction tone is usually as close to the height of the ditch as possible. The elevation of the travel tone will be higher or lower than the height of the construction tone, depending on the area's natural grade. The two-tone approach reduces the amount of dirt and rock that must be moved. The need for ATWS at these locations is necessary to accommodate excavated material from the temporary cut and fill areas while allowing for the temporary storage of trench spoil, excess rock material, cut timber, and in some cases salvageable topsoil. In addition, previously existing rock that is currently stored on the ROW from construction of the existing 300 Line will have to be accounted for in this need for additional ATWS requirement.
When side slopes that require special construction are encountered, the following techniques will be used. During grading, the up-slope side of the pipeline ROW will be cut. The material removed from the cut will be used to fill the down-slope edge of the ROW to provide a safe and level surface from which to operate the heavy equipment. During grade restoration, the spoil is placed back in the cut and compacted. Any springs or seeps found in the cut will be carried down-slope through PVC pipe and/or gravel French drains installed as part of the cut restoration.
In the areas of construction where the slope exceeds 28 degrees or more, a special means of manipulating the construction equipment must be utilized. The preferred method will be “winching” the equipment. This process consists of placing and anchoring a tractor at the top of the slope and using a winch to manipulate the equipment up and down the slope.
In areas of rugged topography, ROW restoration will begin within 10 days of final pipeline installation to minimize potential erosion and sedimentation control problems.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-20
June 2010
TABLE 5.3-1 STEEP SLOPES (>28 DEGREES) CROSSED BY THE 300 LINE PROJECT
Loop ID MP Distance (feet)
325
4.62 – 4.98 1,900 7.45 – 7.56 550 8.07 – 8.15 450
11.09 – 11.21 650 11.52 – 11.74 1,200 12.36 – 12.41 280 12.44 – 12.52 440 12.71 – 12.77 330 15.29 – 15.39 520 15.46 – 15.55 460
Loop 325 Subtotal 6,780
5.3 Drag Sections The drag-section construction method is another method that reduces the width of the construction ROW and is normally preferred over the stove-pipe method. This technique involves the trenching, installation, and backfill of a prefabricated length of pipe containing several segments all in one day. As in the stove-pipe method, the trench is backfilled and/or covered with steel plates or timber mats at the end of each day after the pipe is lowered in.
5.4 Stovepipe The stove-pipe construction method is typically used when the pipeline is to be installed in very close proximity to an existing structure and an open trench would have an adverse impact. The technique involves installing one joint of pipe at a time in which the welding, weld inspection, and coating activities are all performed in the open trench, thereby reducing the width of the construction ROW. At the end of each day, the trench is backfilled and/or covered with steel plates or timber mats. The length of excavation performed each day will typically not exceed the amount of pipe installed.
5.5 Topsoil Salvage and Storage (Figure R2A, R2B, R3A, R3B, R4A, R4B) Topsoil handling objectives are to salvage, store, and redistribute the highest quality soils suitable for re-vegetation and for maintenance of surface color (highest quality soil is defined as surface soil that contains higher amounts of organic matter as well as the soil seedbank).
Topsoil stripping width, depth and storage will vary along the pipeline route depending on criteria such as: potential safety hazards, construction techniques, land use, soil characteristics, grading requirements, vegetation landowner preference, and methods for crossing wetlands, streams, canals, roads, etc. Topsoil will be salvaged wherever the right-of -way is graded unless otherwise specified.
In all areas where topsoil salvage is required, the Contractor shall strip and segregate up to 12 inches of the topsoil layer. In soils where the actual topsoil depth is less than the specified depth of salvage, the Contractor shall strip and segregate the topsoil layer by stripping the topsoil to a depth where the topsoil color changes to the color of a distinct underlying soil horizon.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-21
June 2010
Topsoil stripping widths are depicted on the Construction Drawings and will consist of blade width stripping, trench and spoil side stripping and full right-of-way stripping. Trench width stripping may be substituted for blade width stripping where Tennessee Gas Pipeline and the Contractor agree that there would be no substantial difference between the two similar methods.
The contractor shall strip and segregate topsoil from over the trench in wetlands, except from the areas where standing water or saturated soils are present.
The contractor shall strip and segregate topsoil from over the trench and from the spoil and subsoil storage areas in all agricultural lands as defined in the appropriate state Agricultural Impact Mitigation Agreement in rangeland and other grasslands, in sand wetlands in New Jersey, in residential areas and in other areas as designated on the Construction Drawings or as directed by Tennessee Gas Pipeline’s Representative.
The contractor shall strip and segregate topsoil from over the trench and from the spoil and subsoil storage areas in all residential lands unless otherwise authorized by the landowner. In residential areas the Contractor may replace topsoil (i.e., import topsoil) if approved by Tennessee Gas Pipeline’s Representative. The EI will oversee and approve of all imported material as required and ensure that the Contractor adheres to the restoration and mitigation plans defined for residential construction.
The stripped and segregated topsoil shall be piled separately from the trench spoil with a minimum separation of 1 foot. Topsoil shall not be allowed to mix with subsoil or trench spoil. The Contractor shall not use topsoil to pad the pipe, for trench breakers or for any other purpose.
Additional salvage measures to protect the topsoil resource include:
• Gaps will be left in topsoil piles where drainages, drains and ditches occur and where livestock and farm machinery crossings are located.
• Topsoil will be piled in a manner that minimizes increases in water content.
• Topsoil will not be stripped during excessively wet (soil moisture high enough to foul blades, rut deeply or conglomerate mud on tires and tracks) and/or inordinately windy (large plumes of soil particles visibly moving during stripping operations) conditions.
• Topsoil will not be used as padding or backfill in the trench, to fill sacks for trench breakers, or for any other use as a construction material.
• Where boring methods are used under roads, railroads, and all other areas impractical for trenching, topsoil will be stored on either side of the bell hole separate from the spoil material.
• Topsoil will be pushed away from streams, trees, dugouts, and wetlands and stored on the uphill side of the disturbance away from the spoil pile.
Where grade cuts result in additional spoil, the spoil may be stored on either side of the working area. In such cases, topsoil shall be stripped from the entire work space prior to grading so that subsoil is not stored on topsoil. The Contractor shall be responsible for all of the grading, topsoil salvage and restoration work at no additional cost to Tennessee Gas Pipeline.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-22
June 2010
5.6 Residential Area Construction For a tabulation of those residences located within 50 feet of the proposed construction work area, reference Table 8.2-2 in Resource Report 8 of the FERC ER. Construction through or near residential areas would be done in a manner to ensure that all construction activities minimize adverse impacts on residences and that cleanup is prompt and thorough. Access to homes would be maintained, except for the brief periods essential for laying the new pipeline. This will be coordinated with the Landowners in advance of the work in order to minimize the landowner’s inconvenience to the greatest extend possible. In addition Tennessee has provided site-specific residential construction drawings that identify measures to minimize disruption and maintain access to the residences (see Volume IV – Appendix U of the FERC ER).
Temporary construction impacts on residential areas could include inconvenience caused by noise and dust generated by construction equipment, personnel, and trenching of roads or driveways; ground disturbance of lawns; removal of trees, landscaped shrubs, or other vegetative screening between residences; potential damage to existing septic systems or wells; and removal of aboveground structures such as fences, sheds, or trailers from the right-of-way. Affected landowners will be notified at least 3 to 5 days before construction commences, unless more advance notice is required pursuant to landowner agreement. Tennessee would implement general measures to minimize construction-related impacts on all residence and other structures located within 50 feet of the construction right-of- way, including:
• attempt to maintain, where feasible, a minimum distance of 25 feet between any residence and the edge of the construction work area;
• install safety fence at the edge of the construction right-of-way for a distance of 100 feet on either side of the residence;
• fence the boundary of the construction work area to ensure that construction equipment and materials, including the spoil pile, remain within the construction work area;
• attempt to leave mature trees and landscaping intact within the construction work area unless the trees and landscaping interfere with the installation techniques or present unsafe working conditions;
• ensure piping is welded and installed as quickly as reasonably possible to minimize the amount of time a neighborhood is affected by construction;
• backfill the trench as soon as possible after the pipe is laid or temporarily place steel plates over the trench; and
• complete final cleanup, grading, and installation of permanent erosion control devices within 10 days after backfilling the trench, weather permitting.
To ensure that the trench is backfilled within ten days after pipeline installation, Tennessee will use a typical pipeline construction sequence in which the pipeline installation crew is followed by a separate backfill crew. Tennessee will require it contractor, by contractual agreement, to backfill trenches in residential areas as soon as practical after the installation of the pipeline. The minimal length of each construction spread will not require construction crews to be separated by significant distances during pipeline construction. Pipeline construction crews will be in close proximity to each other and will be able to efficiently communicate during the entire construction phase of the Project.
Topsoil in landscaped lawns will either be segregated and replaced or topsoil will be imported. Immediately after backfilling, residential areas will be restored and all construction debris will be removed. Compaction testing will be performed and soil compaction mitigation will be performed in severely compacted areas. Lawns will be raked,
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-23
June 2010
topsoil added as necessary, and restored per landowner agreements. Ornamental shrubs will be replaced, where possible.
Private property such as mailboxes, fences, gates, and other structures that have been removed will be restored. Sidewalks, driveways, and roads disturbed by pipeline construction would be restored to original or better condition upon completion of construction activities. Additionally, Tennessee will test water wells within 150 feet of the construction workspace, both before and after construction. After restoration is completed, a Tennessee representative will contact landowners to ensure that conditions of all agreements have been met and that the landowner has been compensated for damage incurred during construction.
If the construction right-of- way crosses a road, Tennessee will maintain access so residents have ingress/egress to their homes. If the road is open cut, one lane will remain open during construction or traffic will be detoured around the work area through the use of adjacent roadways. Traffic safety personnel will be present during construction periods, and signage and safety measures would be developed in compliance with applicable state and local roadway crossing permits. To the maximum extent practicable, Tennessee will schedule work within roadways to avoid commuter traffic and impacts on school bus schedules.
The stove-pipe or drag-section pipeline construction methods would be used in residential areas as described below.
5.6.1 Stove-Pipe Construction Method The stove-pipe construction method is typically used when the pipeline is to be installed in very close proximity to an existing structure and an open trench would have an adverse impact. The technique involves installing one joint of pipe at a time whereby the welding, weld inspection, and coating activities are all performed in the open trench, thereby reducing the width of the construction right-of-way. At the end of each day after the pipe is lowered-in, the trench is backfilled and/or covered with steel plates or timber mats. The length of excavation performed each day cannot exceed the amount of pipe installed.
5.6.2 Drag-Section Method The drag-section construction method is another method that reduces the width of the construction right-of-way and is normally preferred over the stove-pipe method. This technique involves the trenching, installation, and backfill of a prefabricated length of pipe containing several segments all in one day. As in the stove-pipe method, the trench is backfilled and/or covered with steel plates or timber mats at the end of each day after the pipe is lowered in. Use of the drag-section technique typically requires adequate staging areas outside of the residential congestion for assembly of the prefabricated sections.
5.7 Boring (Figure BRC) Boring entails drilling a hole below travel arteries, such as highways, through which the pipe will pass. First, a bore pit is dug on one side of the artery and a receiving pit dug on the other. The bore pit is excavated to a depth equal to the depth of the ditch and is graded such that the bore will follow the grade of the pipe. A boring machine is lowered to the bottom of the bore pit and placed on supports. The machine cuts a shaft under the artery using a cutting head mounted on an auger. The auger rotates in a casing, both of which are pushed forward as the hole is cut. The pipeline is then pushed through the casing. The casing is removed and the area between the pipeline and the shaft is grouted, as necessary, within 24 hours.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-24
June 2010
5.8 Jacking Jacking is another type of boring method except an open-ended casing is forced, or jacked, through the earth. Soils are then removed from the casing. The remainder of the installation procedure is identical to that described for boring. At this time, Tennessee is not proposing this construction technique for the 300 Line Project.
5.9 Directional Drilling (Figure DD1) Directional drilling is an advanced boring method that requires the drilling of a small diameter hole, or pilot hole, along a predetermined design path. The pilot hole is then gradually enlarged sufficiently to accommodate the pipeline to be installed. The pipeline may or may not be installed concurrently with the hole enlargement depending upon the final diameter of the enlarged hole and the soil conditions encountered. The following conditions also apply to directional drilling:
• Excavation of the drill entry and exit locations will be necessary to contain drilling fluids during all phases of the installation. These fluids and cuttings must be disposed of in an approved manner periodically or at the completion of the crossing installation.
• The crossing length and cross sectional geometry is dependent upon the pipeline design parameters, the obstacle to be crossed, and the subsurface conditions.
• Additional temporary workspace, including pipe staging areas and storage areas for drilling mud and borehole cuttings, will be located in upland areas outside of wetlands and riparian zones wherever practicable.
• Sediment barriers will be installed on the downgradient side of upland spoil storage areas.
This method requires a large amount of additional temporary workspace and is only used in areas where boring and conventional open cut methods are not suitable.
5.10 Equipment Crossovers At an equipment crossover, the working side of the ROW is temporarily shifted to the other side of the ROW. Equipment crossovers are used to enhance constructability and/or to reduce impacts to sensitive areas such as residential, wetland, and archaeological sites.
The use of equipment crossovers are reserved for extreme circumstances because of the requirements for the construction equipment to work backwards and for the necessity of padding the "hot" line if the Project is the construction of a loop line.
5.11 Agricultural Area Construction (R3A, R3B, R4A, R4B) In predominantly agricultural areas, Tennessee may have an Agricultural Specialist on-site during construction. Prior to construction, Tennessee will contact landowners to locate existing and future locations of drainage tiles and irrigation systems. Water flow in crop irrigation systems will be maintained unless its shutoff is coordinated with the affected parties.
Tennessee will develop a Grazing Deferment Plan with willing landowners, grazing permittees, and land management agencies to minimize grazing disturbance of revegetation efforts, if appropriate.
At a minimum, Tennessee will adopt the following measures described below in actively farmed areas affected by project construction.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-25
June 2010
5.11.1 Grading
• Prior to grading, the EI will determine and record the depth of topsoil to be stripped and segregated. The depth to which the topsoil will be stripped will be to its actual depth or to a maximum depth of 12 inches, unless otherwise specified by the landowner.
• Natural flow patterns shall be maintained by providing breaks in soil stockpiles.
• Stones will be required at paved road crossings in agricultural areas to facilitate equipment access. Geotextile fabric shall be laid down first so that all the stone can be removed during final cleanup.
• In all actively cultivated agricultural lands, which includes permanent or rotated cropland, hayfields, orchards, or vineyards, ROW topsoil stripping shall be used, unless otherwise specified by the landowner. Tennessee will utilize either full ROW topsoil segregation or ditch plus spoilside topsoil segregation, as requested by the landowner, as required by the County Soil Conservation District, or as appropriate based upon site-specific conditions. Upon the completion of backfilling operations, the topsoil will be properly replaced over the graded area.
5.11.2 Ditching / Lowering-In / Backfilling
• Topsoil will be segregated, as specified by the landowner(s).
• Depth of cover over the pipeline shall be a minimum of 3 feet in cropland, hayland, improved pasture, and areas with anticipated drain tile installation within the next 3 years except in areas where there is an existing pipeline.
• Depth of cover over the top of trench breakers shall not be closer than 2 feet from the restored surface.
5.11.3 Drain Tiles (Figures DT1, DT2) The Contractor may cut through all drainage tiles with the trenching machine except tile in those locations where such cutting is prohibited, as marked with flagging by Tennessee Gas Pipeline or as noted on the Construction Line List. At the time an operational tile is cut, the Contractor shall immediately mark the location of such damaged tile using a lath with colored ribbon flagging and a written record maintained of each tile crossing. Such markers shall be kept in place and shall not be removed except by the tile repair crew after the tile has been permanently repaired and such repair has been inspected and approved by Tennessee Gas Pipeline’s Representative.
All drain tiles damaged/cut by excavation of the pipeline trench will be immediately marked with a lath and ribbon in the spoil bank. A work crew immediately following the pipeline trench crew will complete a temporary repair consisting of a temporary pipe bridge installed across the trench to allow continuing flow without obstructions, blockage, or breaks in tile. Feeder drains shall be capped so that flows are diverted to the primary drain.
The temporary drain tile repair will be removed just prior to lowering-in the pipeline.
All drain tiles must be permanently repaired before the pipeline trench is backfilled and within 14 days of construction completion, weather and soil conditions permitting. Composition of replacement tiles will comply with the County Conservation Districts. Specialists will be used, as necessary, to verify repairs and adequate testing of the drainage systems. The drain tile marker shall not be removed until the tile repairs have been inspected, approved, and accepted by Tennessee Gas Pipeline’s inspectors and/or the landowner/tenant. Records of drainage system repairs will be kept and given to the landowner.
The Contractor shall install the pipeline at sufficient depth at points of undercrossing such that no interference will occur between the repaired section of drainage tile and the pipeline.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-26
June 2010
5.11.4 Restoration and Revegetation
• Final grading shall be completed within 20 days after backfilling, weather permitting.
• Construction debris shall be removed from the ROW.
• Rutting or compaction shall be repaired prior to revegetating disturbed areas.
• The ROW shall be graded to pre-construction contours, except where original contours were irregular and more uniform contours may be acceptable.
• The topsoil and subsoil shall be tested for compaction. Corps-style cone penetrometers or other appropriate devices will be used. Tests shall be conducted at intervals sufficient to determine the need for decompaction. Tests shall be done on the same soil type under the same moisture conditions. Tests shall be conducted in the following areas:
a. undisturbed areas;
b. soil stockpile areas;
c. the trenched zone;
d. the work area; and
e. any traffic areas related to the Project.
• Soil shall be decompacted by using a harrow, paraplow, paratill or other equipment. Deep subsoil shattering shall be performed with a subsoiler tool having angled legs. The subsoil shall be decompacted prior to replacement of the segregated topsoil.
• Rock shall be removed from the top 12 inches (topsoil layer) or to the existing subsoil horizon during initial clean-up to a level such that the construction ROW is similar to surrounding areas. During the backfilling and restoration phases, topsoil will be replaced, and any stones greater than four inches in diameter uncovered during construction will be removed or handled in accordance with individual landowner agreements.
• Permanent water bars shall not be constructed in agricultural land.
• The EI or Agricultural Specialist in cooperation with the landowner shall determine the specific revegetation requirements. The ROW shall be limed, fertilized, seeded and mulched in accordance with these specific requirements.
• Tennessee will monitor crop productivity and success of revegetation measures for not less than two (2) years to determine the need for additional restoration.
5.12 Wetland Crossings Tennessee has developed site-specific wetland crossing plans to be implemented during construction. Other pre-established site-specific construction information is discussed in Section 6.0.
Tennessee will protect and minimize potential adverse impacts to wetlands by:
• expediting construction in and around wetlands, and limiting the amount of equipment and mainline construction activities within wetlands to reduce disturbances of wetland soils;
• restoring wetlands to the original contours and flow regimes to the greatest extent practical;
• permanently stabilizing upland areas near wetlands as soon as possible after backfilling; and
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-27
June 2010
• inspecting the ROW periodically during and after construction and repairing any erosion control or restoration features until permanent revegetation is successful.
5.12.1 General Conditions The size of additional temporary work space areas at wetland crossings will be minimized. Additional work space areas will be located at least 50 feet from the edge of the wetland where topographic conditions permit. The wetlands and setbacks will be clearly marked prior to the start of construction. Spoil will be temporarily placed immediately adjacent to the trenchline where topsoil has been segregated or hauled for temporary storage in an upland area adjacent to the wetland, as appropriate.
Tennessee will follow the spill prevention measures described in Section 7.0. Hazardous materials, chemicals, fuels or lubricating oils will not be stored nor will concrete coating activities (except field joints) be performed within 100 feet of a wetland or waterbody boundary. Refueling will not take place within 100 feet of any waterbody or wetland.
Aboveground facilities will not be located in any wetland, except where the location of such facilities outside of wetlands would prohibit compliance with U.S. Department of Transportation regulations.
The following is a list of conditions generally applicable for all wetland crossings. Other measures located under the specific wetland crossing method procedures may be substituted or additional to these general conditions.
5.12.1.1 Clearing
• No rubber-tired equipment will be allowed to work in wetlands unless it will not damage the root systems and its use is approved by the LEI. Bulldozers will not be used for clearing. Trees and brush will be cut by hand at ground level by hydroaxes, tree shears, grinders or chain saws.
• The minimum clearing necessary to safely construct the pipeline will be done. Mats or pads may be placed over top of existing vegetation, including shrubs, where possible.
• Stumps will be left in place, except on the trenchline or unless the removal is necessary to ensure worker safety. Stumps may be ground to a suitable height for safety reasons.
• All timber and brush will be removed from the wetlands. Grindings will be removed as much as practical. Debris and stumps will not be buried.
• Where stumps must be removed from areas outside the trenchline, Tennessee will identify these areas in a report, which includes a replanting plan developed and implemented to ensure the reestablishment of woody vegetation. This report will be submitted to the EH&S Operations within 90 days of the completion of construction in the wetland.
5.12.1.2 Grading
• Prior to grading, topographic elevations shall be noted so that original contours can be achieved during restoration. Unnatural features and unstable grades shall be noted by the EI.
• Erosion control measures shall be installed prior to grading at all stream, wetland, and road crossings.
• Grading will be limited to the areas directly over the trenchline, except where topography requires additional grading for safety reasons. Where grading is required, topsoil will be segregated and returned as an even layer to all graded areas.
• Grading along waterbodies within wetlands will be performed according to requirements in Section 5.12.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-28
June 2010
5.12.1.3 Trenching
• Where rock has been removed from the ditch, it will be stored with subsoil material.
• Spoil will be contained with silt fences and/or straw bales, as necessary, to prevent spoil materials from flowing into waterbodies or off of the construction ROW.
5.12.1.4 Lowering-in\Backfilling
• The trench will be backfilled with subsoil first. After the subsoil has been rough graded, topsoil will be replaced in an even layer.
• Spoil material imported from off the ROW must be approved by the EI.
• Where rock (boulders, etc.) was part of the surface features prior to construction of the pipeline, rock will be placed back in the wetland in approximately the same configuration as pre-construction. Treatment of rock (boulders, etc.) within a wetland may also be performed as described in 4.1.2 and 5.1.
• Permanent trench plugs and water bars shall be installed at both ends of the wetland to prevent drainage of the wetland along the pipeline trench. Large wetlands shall have additional trench plugs installed every 100 feet.
• Because wetland soils are generally soft, and the pipe is concrete coated or weighted down to prevent negative buoyancy, pipeline padding is usually not necessary.
5.12.1.5 Cleanup/Restoration
• Restoration shall begin within 20 days of backfilling, weather permitting,
• All construction debris shall be removed following backfilling of the pipeline.
• Once backfilling is complete, Tennessee will restore the original contours and flow regimes to the extent practical, with the exceptions of unnatural features and unstable grades.
• Following restoration of the substrate, wetlands shall be seeded and/or mulched according to stabilize the area until indigenous wetland species can re-establish themselves. Annual ryegrass shall not be placed into any wetlands in Bradford, County, PA or in other wetland areas where standing water is present. No lime or fertilizer, nor binding agents shall be used in any wetlands. If the wetland is within an active agricultural parcel, reseeding will be performed according to appropriate land management or state agency permits and/or landowner agreements.
5.12.1.6 Monitoring
• Tennessee will monitor wetland revegetation efforts annually for the first three years after construction or until wetland revegetation is successful. At the end of three years after construction, Tennessee will file a report with the Secretary identifying the status of the wetland revegetation efforts. The report will include the percent cover achieved and problem areas. An annual report will be filed until wetland revegetation is successful. Revegetation will be considered successful if the cover of herbaceous and/or woody species is at least 80 percent of the type, density and distribution of the vegetation in adjacent wetland areas that were not disturbed by construction. If the area is not showing signs of re-establishing native wetland vegetation during the third growing season following construction, Tennessee will develop and implement (in consultation with a professional wetland ecologist and/or other state and federal regulatory agencies, as needed) a plan to revegetate the wetland with native wetland species. Revegetation efforts will continue until revegetation is successful. Tennessee will incorporate any wetland monitoring measures required by applicable state agencies in addition to those outlined above.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-29
June 2010
5.12.2 Wetland Crossing Procedures Although pre-determined, Tennessee will use one of the following methods, depending on the site-specific conditions present during construction:
Method I: Standard Pipeline Construction Method
Method II: Conventional Wetland Construction Method
Method III Push/Pull Wetland Construction Method
Unless conditions are wet enough during the time of construction, it is expected that Method II will be used for all wetland crossings. Construction specifications include those identified in Sections 4.0 and 5.11.1. These methods identify specifications that will be used in addition to those in Sections 4.0 and 5.11.1.
5.12.2.1 Method I: Standard Pipeline Construction (Figure WW2A, WW2B)
Wetland Method I can be used in wetlands where soils are dry enough at the time of construction to support equipment. This crossing method requires topsoil segregation.
Clearing
• This method requires no special stabilization techniques because conditions can support construction equipment.
• If timber mats are not used, soil will be de-compacted using a harrow, paraplow, paratill or other equipment. Deep subsoil shattering shall be performed with a subsoiler tool having angled legs.
Conventional Wetland Construction, Wetland Method II, will be used for crossing all wetlands that do not have standing water at the time of construction or that can otherwise support construction equipment working off of timber mats. Because the soils are saturated, there is a need to stabilize the ROW during construction. As an alternative or if specifically required through agency consultations, Wetland Method III may be used.
• Clearing within the wetland will be minimized. The width cleared will be limited to only that necessary to install the pipeline.
• Trees and brush will be cut just above or at ground level by hand, with low ground pressure equipment, or with equipment supported by timber mats.
• Tennessee will not use dirt, rock, pulled tree stumps or brush rip-rap to stabilize the travel lane.
• Timber mats may be placed over existing vegetation where grading is not required.
• Sediment barriers shall be installed prior to grading, as needed, to protect adjacent wetland areas.
5.12.2.2 Method II: Conventional Wetland Construction (Figure WW2A, WW2B)
Conventional Wetland Construction, Wetland Method II, will be used for crossing wetlands with saturated soils or soils otherwise unable to support mainline construction equipment. Because the soils are saturated, there is a need to stabilize the ROW during construction. As an alternative or if specifically required through agency consultations, Wetland Method III may be used.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-30
June 2010
Clearing
• Clearing within the wetland will be minimized. The width cleared will be limited to only that necessary to install the pipeline.
• Trees and brush will be cut at ground level by hand, with low ground pressure equipment, or with equipment supported by timber mats.
• Tennessee will not use dirt, rock, pulled tree stumps or brush rip-rap to stabilize the travel lane.
• Tennessee will stabilize the ROW using timber rip-rap (corduroy roads), or fabricated timber mats. Tennessee will attempt to use no more than two layers of timber to stabilize the ROW.
• Timber mats may be placed over existing vegetation where grading is not required.
• Sediment barriers shall be installed prior to grading, as needed, to protect adjacent wetland areas.
5.12.2.3 Method III: Push/Pull Wetland Construction (Figure WW3A, WW3B)
Push/Pull Wetland Construction, Wetland Method III will be used in large wetland areas where sufficient water is present for floating the pipeline in the trench, and grade elevation over the length of the push/pull area will not require damming to maintain adequate water levels for floatation of the pipe.
Clearing
• Clearing within the wetland will be minimized. The width cleared will be limited to only that necessary to install the pipeline. Timber mats may be placed over existing herbaceous vegetation where grading is not required and trees and/or woody species have been cleared.
• Trees and brush will be cut at ground level by hand, with low ground pressure equipment, or with equipment supported by timber mats.
• Tennessee will not use dirt, rock, pulled tree stumps or brush rip-rap to stabilize the travel lane.
• Sediment barriers shall be installed prior to grading, as needed, to protect adjacent wetland areas.
Grading
• Grading in inundated wetlands will be held to a minimum and generally will not be necessary due to the typically level topography and the absence of rock outcrops in such areas.
Trenching
• Tennessee will use amphibious excavators (pontoon mounted backhoes) or tracked backhoes (supported by fabricated timber mats or floats) to dig trenches.
5.13 Waterbody Crossings (Figure STC) Tennessee has developed site-specific plans for major waterbody crossings to be implemented during construction. Other pre-established site-specific construction information is discussed in Section 6.0.
Tennessee shall protect and minimize potential adverse impacts to waterbodies by:
• expediting construction and limiting the amount of equipment and activities in waterbodies;
• reducing clearing, leaving in place as many trees as possible on stream banks;
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-31
June 2010
• constructing waterbody crossings as perpendicular to the axis of the waterbody channel as engineering and routing conditions allow;
• maintaining ambient downstream flow rates;
• removing all construction material and structures from the waterbody after construction;
• restoring stream channels and bottoms to their preconstruction contours or better, and stabilizing the stream channel prior to directing flow through the construction work area;
• permanently stabilizing stream banks and adjacent upland areas immediately after final grading; and
• inspecting ROWs periodically during and after construction and repairing any erosion controls and/or performing restoration, as needed, in a timely manner;
• when required, the Commission will be notified at least 14 days prior to beginning any in-stream trenching activities; and, Tennessee will notify appropriate state authorities at least 48 hours before beginning trenching or blasting within the waterbody, as permitted.
• should blasting be required, the explosives within the waterbody will be padded with blasting mats only, no spoil material will be used for padding.
5.13.1 General Conditions The following is a list of conditions generally applicable to all waterbody crossings. Other measures located under the specific waterbody crossing method procedures may be substituted or additional to these general conditions.
5.13.1.1 Schedule
Tennessee anticipates (weather permitting) completing trenching, installing pipe and backfilling of "minor" waterbody crossings (less than 10 feet wide) within 24 continuous hours and "intermediate" waterbodies (10 feet to 100 feet in width) within 48 continuous hours, unless blasting is required. If site-specific, physical conditions are encountered during construction that makes these time restrictions impractical, then a site-specific plan will be developed. Waterbody crossings may require additional time if blasting is required. In any case, Tennessee will ensure that construction across waterbodies is completed in the shortest amount of time possible to minimize the duration of potential adverse impacts.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-32
June 2010
In addition, crossing of waterbodies with significant fisheries values shall be restricted to specific months of the year as follows:
State Water and Classification
In-Stream Work Windowa Applicable Regulationb
New Jersey Trout Production
Waters (not including Rainbow Trout)
March 16 through September 14
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
New Jersey Trout Stocked Waters June 16 through March 14
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
New Jersey Trout Maintenance Waters
June 16 through March 14
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
New Jersey Any water located
within 1 mile upstream of a trout stocked or
trout maintenance water
June 16 through March 14
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
New Jersey Waters that support General Game Fish July 1 through April 30 N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5
Table E
New Jersey Waters that support Pickerel
May 1 through to Ice Out
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
New Jersey Waters that support Walleye
June 1 through Last day in February
N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E
a: Timing restrictions specific to each waterbody crossing along the 300 Line loop segments are identified in Resource Report 2 of Tennessee’s Environmental Report.
b: N.J.A.C 7:13 – 10.5 Table E identifies the Time Periods during which construction activities are prohibited for fisheries resources. Dates in the above table have been modified to reflect the time period during which construction activities are allowed to occur.
Pipeline installations in waterbodies containing fisheries resources outside of the allowed work windows would be limited to trenchless construction procedures, such as bores and horizontal directional drills, which avoid excavating the bed and banks of a waterbody. Tennessee will adhere to their ECP to mitigate sedimentation and erosion within and adjacent to all waterbodies crossed by the pipeline alignment.
Tennessee is proposing waterbody crossing procedures that are more stringent than those set forth in the FERC Procedures. Section V.B.6 of the FERC Procedures requires that the pipeline must be installed using a dry-ditch method for waterbody crossings up to 30 feet wide (at the water's edge at the time of construction) and that are state-designated as either coldwater or significant coolwater or warmwater fisheries. Unless otherwise approved by NJDEP, Tennessee is committing to cross all jurisdictional waters (excluding upland conveyances, such as roadside ditches and hillside drainageways) with discernible flow at the time of construction using a dry-ditch method, regardless of fishery classification and crossing width. The use of a dry-ditch crossing method, together with the proposed timing restrictions and restoration methods, are expected to minimize the extent and duration of potential impacts to fisheries and associated habitat.
5.13.1.2 Additional Work Space Areas
Staging areas for waterbody crossings will be minimized. Additional temporary work space areas will be located approximately 50 feet beyond the stream banks (site-specific conditions permitting). If site-specific conditions do not permit a 50-foot setback, these areas must be located at least 10 feet from the edge of water.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-33
June 2010
Tennessee will follow the spill prevention measures described in Section 7.0. Hazardous materials, chemicals, fuels or lubricating oils will not be stored, equipment will not be refueled, nor will concrete coating activities (excluding field joints) be performed within 100 feet of a stream bank or wetland.
5.13.1.3 Spoil Pile Placement/Control (Figure WW4)
Spoil will be stored at least 10 feet from the edge of water at waterbody crossings and will be contained with sediment control devices to prevent spoil materials from flowing into waterbodies or off of the ROW. Spoil will not be stored in waterbodies.
Any pumped water from the trench and other excavated areas must be filtered prior to discharging into any waterbody. Either filter bags or sediment traps shall be used if discharge to a well-vegetated area is not possible. Filter bags shall be designed to trap particles larger than 150 microns and shall be removed when the bag has been filled to ½ of its total capacity.
5.13.1.4 Equipment Crossings (Figures EC1, EC2, EC3, EC4, WW5A, WW5B)
Measures will include the use of timber mats laid adjacent to and across streambeds, flume pipes covered by fill material (clean gravel or crushed stone), flume pipes covered by fill material overlain with timber mats or portable bridges as approved by the EI.
Flume pipes will conform to waterbody crossing dimensions and alignments. Stream channels will not be permanently straightened or permanently realigned, unless a permit or approval has been acquired to do so. The size and number of the flumes will be sufficient for maximum anticipated flows. Stream channels may be altered temporarily to allow placement of flume pipe(s)/culvert(s) and facilitate the equipment crossing installation. The EI shall record any alterations so that stream channels can be restored to original locations after removal of the crossing.
If fill for an equipment crossing includes log rip-rap or other erodible material, sandbags will be placed in the waterbody, at the upstream and downstream ends of the crossing, to stabilize and seal the flume pipes. To prevent erosion, sandbags will be placed high enough along both sides of the equipment crossing to contain the fill material.
5.13.1.5 Clearing/Grading
• Equipment bridges shall be installed prior to crossing any perennial waterbody or intermittent waterbody that is flowing water. The construction of the equipment crossing will use one of the following:
a. timber mats with or without flume(s), or
b. clean rock fill and flume(s), or
c. a Flexi-float or portable bridge.
• Equipment bridges will be maintained to prevent soil from entering the waterbody.
• Sediment barriers and water bars shall be installed on either side of the waterbody crossing prior to grading unless a 10-foot-wide (minimum) vegetative strip (excluding the equipment crossing) is left in place. Trees greater than 4 inches in diameter may be removed from the vegetative strip at the time of initial clearing.
• Where necessary, the grade of the stream banks will be reduced to form a gradual slope and soil will be pushed or pulled away from the waterbody. Any grading of stream banks shall be done at the time of the stream crossing construction only. If grading of stream banks is necessary to install equipment bridges, the exposed soils shall be immediately stabilized.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-34
June 2010
• If more than one week will pass between the time when the area is cleared and when the pipe is installed, the clearing crew may do one of the following:
a. Leave a 10 foot vegetative strip on either side of the waterbody (excluding the equipment crossing). Trees greater than 4 inches in diameter may be removed from the vegetative strip at the time of initial clearing; or
b. Install sediment barriers at the top of the stream bank, if no vegetative strip is left.
5.13.1.6 Cleanup/Restoration (Figures SB1, SB2)
• Clean gravel fill will be used for the upper 1 foot of trench backfill in all waterbodies that contain cold water fisheries.
• All disturbed areas within the existing channel shall be stabilized before flow is redirected into it. Suitable protection shall be provided for the stream channel from any disturbed areas that have not achieved stabilization.
• During restoration, flume pipes, sand bags and other material will be removed and the stream will be restored to their preconstruction contours or better.
• Stabilize waterbody banks and install permanent sediment barriers immediately upon completing the crossing, weather permitting.
• Equipment crossings will be left in place if they are determined to be necessary for access during seeding. They will be removed if 1) more than one month will pass between final cleanup/grading and the beginning of initial permanent seeding and 2) appropriate alternative access is available.
• Jute thatching, or other erosion control material will be used to stabilize stream banks as necessary. Curlex and other matting with meshes that could entangle wildlife will not be used.
• For slopes greater than 15% within 100 feet of a waterbody jute netting will be used over seed and straw mulch as necessary.
• Rock rip-rap will be placed on the banks of waterbodies where flow conditions prevent the establishment of vegetation.
• Contractors will revegetate disturbed areas as outlined here and in Sections 4.1.6 and 5.11. Sedimentation and erosion will be controlled as described in Section 4.1 of this ECP.
5.13.2 Waterbody Crossing Procedures The methods applied to waterbodies are:
• Method 1: Wet Crossings
a. intermittent and perennial streams that are dry and expected to remain dry at the time of construction
• Methods 2A, 2B, & 3: Dry Crossings
a. perennial streams and all waterbodies flowing water at the time of construction
Construction specifications include those identified in Sections 4.0, 5.8, and 5.12.1. These methods identify specifications that will be used in addition to those in Sections 4.0, 5.8, and 5.12.1.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-35
June 2010
5.13.2.1 Method 1: Wet Crossings (Figures WW2, WW3)
Clearing/Grading
• Clearing crews may cross waterbodies once if stream is not flowing, prior to installing equipment crossings. These crews may construct temporary crossings with timber mats. Temporary crossings may not be used by any subsequent crews. The subsequent crews will be responsible for constructing the long-term equipment crossing.
Trenching/Lowering-in/Backfilling
• If a crossing cannot be completed within 24/48 hours, a flume pipe will be installed and removed only to complete trenching, lowering-in or backfilling. At no time will the flume(s) be removed for more than a continuous 24/48-hour period.
• Where blasting, the banks of the waterbody are to be left intact. If soft plugs must be installed, a reasonable effort will be made to complete pipe installation within 24 hours (minor waterbodies) and 48 hours (intermediate waterbodies) upon completion of the blasting.
• Contractors will use a backhoe or dragline to excavate the trench across the waterbody. Equipment used to dig the trench will work from the stream banks, equipment crossings, or by straddling the trenchline where the width of the waterbody prohibits excavations solely from the banks. The depth of trench will be sufficient to allow a minimum of 36 inches of cover over the pipeline below the streambed.
Cleanup/Restoration
• Stream channels will be backfilled, re-contoured and restored immediately. However, if this is not possible, a flume pipe will be placed over the trench after the pipeline is lowered-in.
• Stream banks will be stabilized immediately after backfilling.
5.13.2.2 Methods 2A, 2B, & 3: Dry Crossings (Figures WC1A, WC1B, WC2A, WCB, DD1)
Methods 2A, 2B, and 3 require that waterbody flow be maintained at all times. Continuous flow will be maintained by (a) fluming the waterbody or (b) pumping the flow from upstream to downstream or (c) horizontally directionally drilling under the waterbody.
Clearing/Grading
• Clearing crews may not cross waterbodies prior to installing equipment crossings. Clearing crews may construct temporary crossings by using timber mats or logs. Temporary crossings may not be used by subsequent crews; these crews will be responsible for constructing the long term equipment crossing.
• Skidders and other vehicles will not drag trees or brush across waterbodies.
Trenching/Lowering-in/Backfilling
• Flumed Crossing – Method 2A (Figure WC2A, WC2B)
a. Efforts will be made not to excavate the streambed during mainline ditching. The banks will be left in place as hard plugs until the pipe is ready to be lowered in. The Contractor will install a flume pipe(s) over the trenchline prior to trenching and maintain until restoration is complete. The size and number of flumes will be sufficient for maximum anticipated flows.
b. Excavation equipment will work around the flume pipe during excavation. The pipe will be threaded under the flume pipe and the ditch will be backfilled while waterbody flows are
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 5-36
June 2010
maintained. If topographic conditions do not permit the pipe to be threaded under the flume, then the flow may be either temporarily pumped while the flume is pulled to lower in the pipe or in low or no flow conditions, the flume is simply pulled long enough to lower in the pipe and then reinstalled prior to backfilling. Flume pipes will be permanently removed as part of restoration.
• Pump-Around – Method 2B (Figure WC1A, WC1B)
a. Pumping will maintain waterbody flows during in-stream activities (except blasting). The pipeline will be lowered in while the waterbody flow is pumped around the site. The streambed will not be excavated during mainline ditching and the stream banks will be left in place as hard plugs until the pipe is ready to be lowered in.
b. Pumps will be used only when direct access to the trench or streambed is required, and not for extended periods of time. Personnel will be present when the pump is in operation. All pump intake hoses will be screened and pump discharges will be directed through energy dissipaters. A spare pump(s) will be available at the site.
c. If a natural sump is not available for the intake hose, an in-stream sump will be created using double bagged sandbags.
d. If the time between any phase of the work becomes extensive or if it is determined that the pumps can not handle the flow within the waterbodies, the pumps will be discontinued and flumes will be installed to maintain the flow.
• Horizontal Directional Drill – Method 3 (Figure DD1)
a. This crossing would be performed as indicated in Section 5.8. Alternatives to this method may be required if unforeseen physical conditions indicate that this method would not be successful. In addition, measures to control any unanticipated returns of drilling fluids will also be available prior to conducting the drill activity (i.e., silt fence, hay bales, etc.).
5.14 Combined Wetland / Waterbody Crossings Wetlands and waterbodies are commonly found together as one ecosystem. The crossing methods used will be based on field conditions to protect both resources equally. It is essential to recognize that individual construction methods will be assigned to both the wetland(s) and the waterbody(ies) to protect the resources. For complex systems, site-specific crossing methods will be designed and contained in Section 6.0 of this ECP for review and approval by the appropriate local, state, and/or federal permitting agency prior to construction, as appropriate or required. This plan shall address at a minimum:
• spoil control; equipment bridges;
• restoration of waterbody banks and wetland hydrology;
• timing of the waterbody crossing;
• method of crossing; and size and location of all extra work areas.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 6-1
June 2010
6.0 Site-Specific Information
Consultation information received from agencies regarding the proposed Project are recorded in this section prior to construction in order to ensure that site-specific conditions are listed and implemented during the construction phase.
6.1 Notification The following shall be notified prior to the start of any construction-related activity:
• The NJ Department of Environmental Protection (NJ DEP) must be notified in 10 days prior to construction and 15 days prior to hydrostatic testing on the 325 Loop Segment. Send notification to:
NJ Department of Environmental Protection DEP Main Building 401 East State Street Trenton, NJ 08625-0402 Telephone:
NJ Department of Environmental Protection Northern Regional Office 7 Ridgedale Ave. Cedar Knolls, NJ 07927 Telephone:
• The Sussex County Conservation District (NJ) must be notified in writing 10 days prior to construction of the 325 Loop Segment. Send notification to:
Sussex County Conservation District 186 Halsey Road, Suite 2 Newton, New Jersey 07860 Telephone: 973.579.5074
• The Hudson/Essex/Passaic County Conservation District (NJ) must be notified in writing 10 days prior to construction of the 325 Loop Segment. Send notification to:
Hudson/Essex/Passaic Counties Conservation District 15 Bloomfield Avenue North Caldwell, New Jersey 07006 Telephone: 973.364.0786
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 7-1
June 2010
7.0 Spill Prevention and Control Plan
7.1 Preventative Measures The spill prevention and control methods listed in this section are based on approved spill control plans that Tennessee has used successfully in the past. The ECP is comprehensive in that it addresses actions used to prevent spills in addition to specifying actions that will be taken should any spills occur, including emergency notification procedures. The Project's on-site EI are responsible for ensuring that Contractors implement and maintain spill control measures. The responsibilities of these inspectors are described in Section 3.0 of this ECP.
7.1.1 Training The Contractor will instruct personnel on the operation and maintenance of equipment to prevent the accidental discharge or spill of fuel, oil, and lubricants. Personnel will also be made aware of the pollution control laws, rules, and regulations applicable to their work.
Spill prevention briefings with the construction crew will be scheduled and conducted by the EI to insure adequate understanding of spill prevention measures. These briefings will highlight:
• precautionary measures to prevent spills;
• sources of spills, such as equipment failure or malfunction;
• standard operating procedures in case of a spill;
• equipment, materials, and supplies available for clean-up of a spill; and
• a list of known spill events.
7.1.2 Equipment Inspection / Maintenance The Contractor will inspect and maintain equipment that must be fueled and/or lubricated according to a strict schedule. The Contractor will submit to Tennessee for approval written documentation of the methods used and work performed.
All containers, valves, pipelines, and hoses will be examined regularly to assess their general condition. The examination will identify any signs of deterioration that could cause a spill and signs of leaks, such as accumulated fluids. All leaks will be promptly corrected and/or repaired.
7.1.3 Refueling
7.1.3.1 Refueling Operations
The Contractor will insure that equipment is refueled and lubricated within the ROW and at least 100 feet away from all waterbodies and wetlands with the following exceptions:
• areas such as rugged terrain or steep slopes where movement of equipment to refueling stations would cause excessive disturbance to the ROW;
• areas where removing equipment from a wetland for servicing would increase adverse impacts to the wetland;
• sites where moving equipment to refueling stations from pre-fabricated equipment pads is impracticable or where there is a barrier from the waterbody/wetland (i.e., road or railroad);
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 7-2
June 2010
• locations where the waterbody or wetland is located adjacent to a road crossing (from which the equipment can be serviced); and
• refueling of immobile equipment including, but not limited to, bending and boring machines, air compressors, padding machines, and hydro-test fill pumps.
In these areas, auxiliary fuel tanks will be used to reduce the frequency of refueling operations and in no case will refueling take place within 100 feet of any known potable water wells.
The Contractor will assure that all refueling is done pursuant to the following conditions:
• Impact minimization measures and equipment will be sufficient to prevent discharged fluids from leaving the ROW or reaching wetlands or waterbodies, and be readily available for use. These will include some combination of the following:
a. dikes, berms or retaining walls sufficiently impervious to contain spilled oil;
b. sorbent and barrier materials in quantities determined by the Contractor to be sufficient to capture the largest reasonably foreseeable spill;
c. drums or containers suitable for holding and transporting contaminated materials;
d. curbing;
e. culverts, gutters, or other drainage systems;
f. weirs, booms, or other barriers;
g. spill diversion or retention ponds; and
h. sumps and collection systems.
• The Contractor will prepare for approval by Tennessee a list of the type, quantity, and the storage location of containment and clean up equipment to be used during construction.
• All spills will be cleaned up immediately. Containment equipment will not be used for storing contaminated material.
7.1.4 Storage Storage containment areas will not have drains, unless such drains lead to a containment area or vessel where the entire spill can be recovered. Hazardous materials shall not be stored within 100 feet of any wetland or waterbody.
7.1.5 Personnel Support Prior to construction, the ROW inspector or agent shall identify and prepare a written inventory of water wells within 150 feet of the construction work area. The Construction ROW Agent will notify the authorities of all potable water supply intakes located within three miles downstream of any crossings a minimum of one week prior to construction.
7.2 Impact Minimization Measures Containment is the immediate priority in the case of a spill. A spill will be contained on Tennessee's property or ROW, if possible. Clean up procedures will begin immediately after a spill is contained. In no case will containment equipment be used to store contaminated material.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 7-3
June 2010
In case of a spill, the Contractor or utility inspector will notify the EI, construction supervisors, and Division contacts immediately. The following contacts are currently assigned to the Project and are subject to change (call in the order listed until someone is reached):
Tennessee Area Offices
Coudersport Area Operations Supervisor (PA): Conrad Grubbs (570) 274-9393 x2023
Agawam Area Operations Supervisor (NJ): John Kennedy (203) 929-6378 x2023
Mercer Area Operations Supervisor (PA): Bob Gropp (724) 662-6423
NY & PA Area Env. Coordinator: Scott Lewis (724) 662-2990 x2036
NJ Area Env. Coordinator: Steve Morawski (860) 763-6012
Coudersport Area Manager: Bret Metzger (814) 274-9393 x2022
Agawam Area Manager: Al Garcia (413) 786-1933 x2022
Mercer Area Manager: Ron Miller (724) 662-6422
Tennessee Houston Office (Houston, Texas)
General Co. Number: (713) 420-2600
Environmental Coordinator: Melissa Dettling (713) 420-3428
Department Manager: Jon Barfield (713) 420-7902
Department Director: Tom Hutchins (713) 420-7918
The NJ DEP also requires that most discharges of hazardous materials be reported to the NJ DEP Hotline (877.WARNDEP).
If the EI determines that a spill is small enough such that the construction crew can safely handle it, the crew will use construction equipment to containerize all spilled material, contaminated soil, and sorbent material in a manner consistent with the spilled materials' characterization.
If the EI determines that a spill cannot be adequately excavated and disposed of by the construction crew alone, the Contractor will contact waste containment specialists. The EI will ensure that all excavated wastes are transported to a disposal facility licensed to accept such wastes. Wastes will not be transported to a company facility unless the DEC approves it in writing.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 7-4
June 2010
The Contractor will prepare a Construction Site Spill Report form to be given to the EI that includes:
a. the date, time and location of the occurrence;
b. a description of the material spilled;
c. the quantity spilled;
d. the circumstances that caused the spill;
e. a list of waterbodies affected or potentially affected by the spill;
f. a statement verifying whether a sheen is present;
g. the size of the affected area;
h. an estimate of the depth that the material has reached in water or on soil;
I. a determination of whether the spill will migrate off of Tennessee's property or the ROW;
j. a determination of whether the spill is under control;
k. a statement verifying that clean-up has begun and a description of the methods being used to clean up the spill; and
l. the names of the people observing the spill (with their affiliations).
m. the Division “Report of Spill” form.
• The EI shall ensure that the Contractor's spill report is complete and shall forward it to the EC in Houston and the DEC in Mercer, PA and Enfield, CT. The EI will assure that the Contractor notifies the appropriate agencies if it is determined that a spill exceeds reportable quantity thresholds.
• The National Response Center (1-800-424-8802) will be notified immediately if spills occur above threshold levels (Clean Water Act, 40 CFR 110.10) into surface waters and/or wetlands.
7.3 Suggested Equipment List Section 7.1.3 of this ECP states that the Contractor will prepare a list of the type, quantity, and location of storage or containment and clean up equipment to be used on the construction site. The list will include the procedures and impact minimization measures to be used in response to a spill. The Contractor's choice of impact minimization measures and equipment will be tailored to meet the characteristics of the affected terrain as well as the types and amounts of material that could potentially be spilled. The types of equipment that Tennessee expects to use to control spills at terrestrial sites and wetlands are described in Section 7.3.1 and Section 7.3.2 of this ECP, respectively.
7.3.1 Terrestrial Construction General equipment that Tennessee will use for spill containment and cleanup on terrestrial areas includes:
• sorbents (pillows, socks, and wipe sheets) for containment and pick up of spilled liquids;
• commercially available spill kits (or the functional equivalent thereof) that are prepackaged, self-contained spill kits containing a variety of sorbents for small to large spills;
• structures such as gutters, culverts, and dikes for immediate spill containment;
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 7-5
June 2010
• shovels, backhoes, etc., for excavating contaminated materials;
• sumps and collection systems; and
• drums, barrels, and temporary storage bags to clean up and transport contaminated materials.
7.3.1.1 Fuels and Lubricating Oil Storage
The Contractor will implement special measures to prevent spills in areas where trucks carrying fuel and where oil barrels are loaded. Containment equipment will be kept close to tanks and barrels to minimize spill response time, and will include absorbent pads or mats. The quantity and capabilities of the mats will be sufficient to capture the largest foreseeable spill, given ROW characteristics and crankcase and other fuel vessel capacities.
7.3.1.2 Routine Refueling and Maintenance
Absorbent pads and mats will be placed on the ground beneath equipment before refueling and maintenance. Equipment that will be stored on site for routine refueling and maintenance includes small sorbent kits (or their functional equivalent).
7.3.1.3 Equipment Failure
Kits with the capacity of absorbing up to five gallons of liquid can fit beneath the operator's seat on construction equipment for use in an equipment failure.
7.3.2 Waterbody and Wetland Crossings For each wetland and waterbody crossed, the equipment listed below will be available in addition to that needed for terrestrial construction. This equipment will be stored close to the water or wetland to minimize response time, and will include:
• oil containment booms and the related equipment needed for rapid deployment, and
• equipment to remove oils from water, such as oleophilic and hydrophobic absorbent booms and mats, and/or mechanical skimmers.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 8-1
June 2010
8.0 Oil and Hazardous Materials Management
Areas along the ROW deemed to be of concern, due to their potentially hazardous nature, will have soil and, as appropriate, groundwater sampling performed on site prior to construction. The results of sampling will be used to determine construction methodologies. Based on the results of the pre-construction sampling, the environmental conditions of the site may be monitored during construction in order to properly handle soil and groundwater as well as to assure the health and safety of workers. Examples of construction monitoring which might occur include periodic sampling of excavated soil, headspace analyses of groundwater in excavation, as well as monitoring of the breathing zone around the construction workers.
All oil and hazardous materials management will be carried out in accordance with local, state and Federal guidelines.
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 9-2
June 2010
9.0 ECP Exceptions to the Commission’s Plan and Procedures
Below are the standard deviations from the Commission’s Plan and Procedures. Others may be appropriate depending upon specific conditions present for a particular project.
9.1 Wetland and Waterbody Construction and Mitigation Measures 1. ATWS located within 50 feet of wetlands are identified in Table 9.2-4, below. Justification for locating
these ATWS areas within 50 feet of wetlands is also provided in the Table. (Procedures, at VI.B.1.a)
2. Tennessee proposes that permanent slope breakers may not always be appropriate for installation at wetland boundaries. At the discretion of the EI, LEI and Tennessee’s contractor, permanent slope breakers that may alter the permanent overland flow characteristics consequently altering the wetland’s characteristics will not be installed. Tennessee proposes the use of hay/straw bales as temporary slope breakers at the wetland boundaries until restoration is complete to ensure the wetland characteristics will remain intact in situations that permanent slope breakers are not used. This exception applies only to the use of a permanent slope breaker. (Procedures, at VI.C.2.)
TABLE 9.2-1 NEW JERSEY WETLAND SEED AND MULCH RATES
Type Rate (lbs/acre)
Seed Annual Rye 40 Mulch Straw 3500
TABLE 9.2-2 NEW JERSEY UPLAND TEMPORARY RESTORATION SEED AND
FERTILIZER RATES
Type Rate (lbs/acre)
Seed Annual rye 44 Fertilizer 10-20-10 610
Limestone Ground 6000 Mulch Straw or salt hay 3500
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 9-3
June 2010
TABLE 9.2-3 NEW JERSEY UPLAND PERMANENT RESTORATION SEED AND
FERTILIZER RATES
Type Rate (lbs/acre)
Seed
Spreading fescue 13 Red fescue 13
Kentucky bluegrass 26 Perennial ryegrass 9
Fertilizer 10-20-10 500 Agricultural Limestone Ground 6000
3800 slow-release nitrogen 300 Mulch Straw or salt hay 3500
Environmental Construction Plan 300 Line Project
New Jersey 9-4
June 2010
TABLE 9.2-4 AREAS OF >75 FEET OF WORKSPACE WITHIN WETLANDS
300 LINE PROJECT
Loop Wetland ID Milepost Justification
325
W016 1.01 Pipe Bend W016 1.25 Wallkill River Crossing
W010 & W011 4.01 Railroad Crossing-Bore W063 16.95 HDD Drill Pull Site W058 17.18 Road Crossing-Bore
Appendix A
Figures
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Figure ACR Typical Access Road Profile
Figure BRC Bored Road Crossing
Figure CF1 Erosion Control Fabric
Figure CF2 Erosion Control Fabric Installation Detail
Figure CO Crossover Existing Pipeline
Figure CS Pipeline Construction Sequence
Figure DD1 Directional Drill
Figure DPCA Dam Pipeline Crossing
Figure DPCB Dam Pipeline Crossing
Figure DT1 Typical Drain Tile Repair
Figure DT2 Typical Drain Tile Repair
Figure EC1 Equipment Crossing, Culvert Bridge
Figure EC2 Equipment Crossing, Mat Bridge
Figure EC3 Equipment Crossing, Rock and Flume Crossing
Figure EC4 Equipment Crossing, Portable Bridge
Figure ED1 Trench Dewatering Energy Dissipater
Figure ED2 Pipeline Hydrotest Dewatering Energy Dissipater
Figure FB Pipeline/Trench Dewatering Filter Bags
Figure FPC Foreign Pipeline Crossing
Figure OCR Open Cut Road Crossing
Figure R1A Construction ROW Existing Line North
Figure R1B Construction ROW Existing Line South
Figure R2A Topsoil Salvage Trench Only Existing Line North
Figure R2B Topsoil Salvage Trench Only Existing Line South
Figure R3A Topsoil Salvage Trench and Spoil Side Existing Line North
Figure R3B Topsoil Salvage Trench and Spoil Side Existing Line South
Figure R4A Topsoil Salvage Full ROW Existing Line North
Figure R4B Topsoil Salvage Full ROW Existing Line South
Figure R5A Side Slope Construction Existing Line North
Figure R5B Side Slope Construction Existing Line South
Figure RC Rock Construction Entrance with Culvert
Figure RRC Typical Railroad Crossing
Figure SB Permanent and Temporary Slope Breakers
Figure SB1 Stream Bank Stabilization, Seed and Mulch
Figure SB2 Stream Bank Stabilization, Jute Blanket with Seed and Mulch
Figure SF1 Silt Fencing Installation at Waterbody, Roadway, and Railroad
Figure SRC Special Residential Construction Work Locations
Figure ST1 Straw Bale Installation at Waterbody, Roadway, and Railroad
Figure STC Stream Crossing
Figure TB1 Trench Breakers, Sandbag
Figure TB2 Trench Breakers, Foam
Figure WC1A Dry Waterbody Crossing, Pump Around
Figure WC1B Dry Waterbody Crossing, Pump Around
Figure WC2A Dry Waterbody Crossing, Flumed
Figure WC2B Dry Waterbody Crossing Flumed
Figure WS Construction Equipment Wash Station
Figure WW1A Wet Waterbody Crossing
Figure WW1B Wet Waterbody Crossing
Figure WW2A Wetland Construction
Figure WW2B1 Wetland Construction
Figure WW2B Wetland Construction
Figure WW3A Push/Pull Wetland Construction
Figure WW3B Push/Pull Wetland Construction
Figure WW4 Temporary Soil Containment Berm for Waterbody Trench Spoil
Figure WW5A Equipment Wetland Crossing
Figure WW5B Equipment Wetland Crossing
Appendix I
Invasive Species Management Plan
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Invasive Species Management Plan
300 LINE PROJECT
LOOP 325 – No-Net Loss Reforestation
Vernon Township, Sussex County, New Jersey
West Milford Township, Passaic County, New Jersey
Submitted by:
1001 Louisiana Street
Houston, Texas 77002
June 2010
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
i
June 2010
Table of Contents
1.0 Introduction .............................................................................................................................................. 1
2.0 Existing Conditions ................................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 Invasive Species Management ................................................................................................................ 2
3.1 Invasive Species Potentially Present ................................................................................................... 2
3.2 General Management Activities ......................................................................................................... 3
Appendices
Appendix A – Invasive Species Fact Sheets
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
1
June 2010
1.0 Introduction
In accordance with the Highlands Protection and Planning Area Applicability and Consistency review,
Tennessee Gas Pipeline Company (“Tennessee”) has prepared a site-specific Invasive Species
Management Plan (“ISMP”) for Loop 325 of the 300 Line Project (“the Project”). This ISMP is taken from the
Comprehensive Mitigation Plan designed for the Project within the Highlands area and is specific to
revegetation of the Right-of-Way (“ROW”) for construction of pipeline looping and aboveground facilities
located in New Jersey. Specific measures to be applied within the State-owned properties are included in
this ISMP.
The specific objective of the ISMP is to control invasive plant species by means of limited herbicide use in
concert with other control methods such as mechanical removal, mowing and cutting, if necessary. The
rationale for controlling invasive species with herbicides is to ensure that the existing ecosystem is not
compromised by the colonization and dominance of these species. Invasive species reduce the
effectiveness of the ecosystem by colonization and dominance of these species. Invasive species reduce
the effectiveness of the ecosystem by competing with existing native species for light, nutrients and water.
They can also change habitat structure, adversely affect native seed production and alter hydrologic
regimes in wetlands. This plan is intended to serve as a guideline for the eradication and/or control of
invasive plant species that occupy the Project area and provide the necessary tools for successful
eradication and/or control of invasive species. This plan is subject to modifications as data collection
warrants.
Although it may be impossible to totally eliminate all invasive species in the Project area because of such
issues as seed drift or colonization from off site locations, Tennessee’s overall goal is to control the invasive
species to a level that wetlands and uplands are not dominated by the invasive species listed in Section
2.1.1 to a point where the function of the system is compromised. Tennessee’s plan, outlined in the
following sections, will be to follow a program to reduce the levels of invasives to a non-dominant position
during the first five (5) years and then incorporate this into the ROW mowing/maintenance plan, thereby
keeping the invasive species populations under control.
2.0 Existing Conditions
The Project is located within and adjacent to the existing Tennessee 300 Line in northern New Jersey. The
Project area consists of upland forest, wetlands, agricultural fields, commercial/industrial and residential
development and existing maintained ROW. Topography varies from agricultural valleys to the steep ridges
and valleys of the New Jersey Highlands.
The majority of the Project area within New Jersey state-owned lands is upland forest including chesnut oak
/ scrub oak, Eastern hemlock / oak, oak / hickory, red maple / Eastern hemlock / yellow birch and red oak /
sweet birch communities. Wetlands identified in the Project area on state-owned lands include palustrine
forested, palustrine scrub-shrub and palustrine emergent systems. Rock outcrops and shallow depth to
bedrock are characteristic where topography rises and along the ridgelines.
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
2
June 2010
3.0 Invasive Species Management
The specific objective of invasive species management is to control invasive plant species within areas
jurisdictional resource areas by means of limited herbicide use in concert with other control methods such
as mechanical removal, mowing and cutting, if necessary. The rationale for controlling invasive species
with herbicides is to ensure that the existing ecosystem is not compromised by the colonization and
dominance of these species. Invasive species reduce the effectiveness of the ecosystem by competing
with existing native species for light, nutrients and water. They can also change habitat structure,
adversely affect native seed production and alter hydrologic regimes. Tennessee’s FERC Certificate
application for the Project includes a Draft Invasive Species Management Plan. That plan is intended to
serve as a guideline for the eradication and/or control of invasive plant species that occupy the Project
area and provide the necessary tools for successful eradication and/or control of invasive species. That
plan is subject to modifications as data collection warrants. Invasive species management will be
conducted on the permanent pipeline easement as well as in temporary workspace areas, unless
otherwise requested by the landowners.
Although it may be impossible to totally eliminate all invasive species in the Project area because of such
issues as seed drift or colonization from off-site locations, Tennessee’s overall goal is to control the
invasive species to a level such that uplands are not dominated by the invasive species listed below to a
point where the function of the system is compromised. Tennessee will follow a program to reduce the
levels of invasive species to a non-dominant position during the first three (3) years following construction.
3.1 Invasive Species Potentially Present
Japanese Barberry (Berberis thunbergii)
Burning bush or Winged Euonymous (Euonymous alatus)
Multiflora rose (Rosa multiflora)
Autumn olive (Elaeagnus umbellate)
Japanese knotweed (Polygonum cuspidatum)
Common buckthorn (Rhamnus cathartica)
Common reed (Phragmites australis), or Phragmites
Asian bittersweet (Celastrus orbiculatus)
Purple loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria)
Reed canary grass (Phalaris arundinacea)
Japanese Maple (Acer palmatum)
Tree of Heaven (Ailanthus altissima)
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
3
June 2010
3.2 General Management Activities
Tennessee plans to use a foliar herbicide method to control invasive species along the proposed
Loop 325 and at aboveground facilities. Invasive species management will be conducted within
the ROW during the same time period as restoration monitoring activities. Herbicides will be
applied according to manufacturers’ printed recommendations and in accordance with federal and
state regulations governing herbicide application. A qualified contractor will be consulted to
determine the best management practice for the application of the approved herbicides and may
suggest methods other than foliar herbicide application. With guidance from a qualified
contractor, Tennessee will also identify the most effective herbicide to use for each application
and may modify application techniques or herbicide brands, based on results, site conditions, etc.
However, if herbicides are not approved by FERC and/or NJDEP, than mechanical methods will
be used in lieu of herbicides.
To provide for stabilization of the ROW post-construction and re-growth of native species,
Tennessee proposes to provide clean (invasive/weed free) topsoil as necessary to re-establish
preconstruction surface contours. Disturbed areas within the ROW will be seeded and mulched
in accordance with the measures outlined in the above sections.
Mechanical cutting methods will also help to control some invasive species on Loop 325. The
removal of invasive species will be incorporated in the ROW maintenance/mowing plan for the
300 Line.
Reapplication of herbicides will occur as needed based on the findings of the monitoring listed
below. Additionally, mechanical methods may be warranted to remove future growth of invasive
species and will be coordinated as needed.
During the first three years following construction, invasive species monitoring will occur at least
yearly and possibly more frequently during the growing season, as recommended by the qualified
contractor. These surveys will be performed during the first five years to determine growth by re-
sprouting plants or re-colonization. Treatment and retreatment will be conducted accordingly,
with timing to be determined by Tennessee and its qualified contractor.
After the third year of monitoring, Herbicide applications will be managed on an as-needed basis,
and eradication efforts will be incorporated into the current ROW mechanical mowing
maintenance plan.
3.2.1 Management Activities Specific to Bearfort Mountain Natural Area
Invasive species management and control will be conducted in all parts of the ROW, cleared
staging areas and in a 100-foot buffer in surrounding forested lands and road sides.
Monitoring will be conducted every two to three years and any invasive species found will be
controlled with spot applications of herbicides.
Reforestation of areas within 500 feet of roadways will be given high priority. These are areas
where invasive species are most prevalent.
Restoration of moist sites with thick topsoil will avoid the use of soil amendments, since use of soil
amendments can increase the potential for invasive species to invade and spread. Locally-derived
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
4
June 2010
plant stock will be used in these areas to maintain local genotypes and restore the pre-clearing
ecological community type.
Restoration will not include the use of non-local grass genotypes or non-native grass species.
Table 3.2-1
Invasive Species Plan Timeline for Loop 325
Month Application/Removal Method Comments
2012a
September None Monitoring of restored ROW to identify colonization of invasive
species
2013
May Foliar Herbicide
July
Foliar Herbicide / Manual Removal
c
2014
May Foliar Herbicide
July
Foliar Herbicide / Manual Removal
2015
May Foliar Herbicide
July
Foliar Herbicide / Manual Removal
2016 & Beyond
ROW mowing Conducted on a 3 - 5 year basis
a: Certain aspects of construction, including winter tree clearing to avoid Indiana bat breeding periods, installation of HDD segments, and sensitive commercial and/or residential areas may begin during the second half of 2010. Tennessee also anticipates that certain construction activities will occur at existing Compressor Station 325 beginning in the second half of 2010. The remaining construction activities for the Project are scheduled for 2011.
b: Mechanical method will consist of the excavation of the root stocks c: Manual removal will consist of the cutting and digging up of the root stocks
d: ROW mowing is conducted on a continual 3 to 5-year rotational basis.
Invasive Species Management Plan 300 Line Project
Loop 325 – No Net Loss Reforestation Sussex and Passaic Counties, New Jersey
5
June 2010
4.0 Summary / Conclusions
Tennessee anticipates conducting the invasive species management within the ROW and aboveground
facility properties in a manner that is consistent with the objective of controlling invasive species such that
they do not pose a threat to the native ecosystems. Based on field surveys for wetland delineation work,
invasive species are present at many locations along the ROW. The proposed management activities
within this plan will significantly reduce existing populations of invasive species while promoting the
establishment of native plant populations. Tennessee will continue to work with landowners along the ROW
and at aboveground facility properties to identify potential colonizing populations of invasive species within
the Project areas and control them in a manner that is consistent with this plan.
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Appendix A Invasive Species Fact Sheets
asdfasdfasdfasdf
Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed - Page 1 of 3
Japanese knotweed Polygonum cuspidatum Siebold & Zucc.
(synonyms: Polygonum zuccarini Small, Fallopia japonica Ronse Decraene, or Reynoutria japonica Houtt.)
and Giant knotweed
Polygonum sachalinense F.W. Schmidt ex Maxim. [synonyms: Fallopia sachalinensis
or Reynoutria sachalinensis (F. Schmidt ex Maxim) Nakai] Buckwheat Family (Polygonaceae)
DESCRIPTION Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed are herbaceous perennials that form large colonies of erect stems that can reach 9 feet in height. They spread by vigorous rhizomes (horizontal stems that grow just below the soil surface). Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed are very similar in appearance and are known to hybridize. The best character for separating them is the shape of the leaf base, those of Japanese knotweed are truncate (squared-off) at the bottom, while those of giant knotweed are heart-shaped. Height - Individual stems are 3–9 feet tall depending on the vigor of the colony.
Stem - The hollow, bamboo-like stems are erect and unbranched or with a few branches toward the tip. Despite their size, knotweed stems are annual; they die back to the rhizome at the end of the growing season. New shoots emerge in April and grow rapidly; early in the season they can grow 3–4 inches per day. Leaves - Leaves are alternate on the stem, simple, 4–6 inches long and almost as wide, and dark green. Japanese knotweed leaves are abruptly squared-off (truncate) at the base; those of giant knotweed have a heart-shaped base. Both narrow to a pointed tip.
Japanese knotweed with flower buds
P. cuspidatum
Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed - Page 2 of 3
Flowers - Both Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed have numerous small, greenish-white lowers that are produced in late summer. Japanese knotweed bears only male or female flowers on a given plant. Giant knotweed blooms have both male and female parts in the same flower. However, appearances can be difficult to interpret as both the male and female flowers of Japanese knotweed have vestigial organs of the other sex present. Fruit and seed - The seed (technically a fruit called an achene) of both knotweeds is shiny black, 3-angled, and about 1/6 inch long. It is enclosed in a winged calyx that contributes to its buoyancy. The seeds have no dormancy requirement and germinate readily. Roots - Roots are present along the rhizome and can extend quite deeply into the soil making knotweed effective in preventing erosion. DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT Japanese knotweed is native to Japan; giant knotweed comes from Sakhalin Island in northern Japan. They were introduced into North America for ornamental use in the late 1800s. Japanese knotweed is now widely naturalized in Europe and North America. In the east it extends from Newfoundland to North Carolina. It is also widespread in the Midwest and in coastal areas of the Pacific Northwest. It is most commonly found lining the banks of creeks and rivers where it often forms an impenetrable wall of stems; it also occurs in wetlands, waste ground, and along roads and railroads. In Pennsylvania knotweed has also been extensively planted at strip mine reclamation sites. EFFECTS OF INVASION Dense stands of knotweed exclude other plant species leading to very limited biological diversity in infested sites. REPRODUCTION AND METHODS OF DISPERSAL Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed both spread vegetatively by the growth and fragmentation of rhizomes. Even a 1–2 inch-long piece of rhizome dislodged by flooding can initiate a new colony when it is deposited downstream. Knotweed also grows from seeds, which are produced in large numbers and dispersed by wind and water. Seed viability is high, and seed bank densities have been measured at 220–1758 seeds per square meter. Highest germination rates occur on exposed mineral soil. CONTROL Mechanical - Repeated cutting of the stems reduces vigor and with persistence might be sufficient to control small, isolated populations. Attempts to dig out the plants are doomed to fail because of the ability of even small segments of rhizome to resprout. Chemical - Research conducted at Penn State for the National Park service resulted in a recommendation of a foliar spray of glyphosate plus sticker-spreader applied in early June and
winged calyx which encloses the fruit (achene) of P. cuspidatum
Japanese knotweed and giant knotweed - Page 3 of 3
again in late August of the same year at the rate of 4 lbs active ingredient per acre. A third application may be needed the following spring if significant regrowth occurs. Rapid establishment of alternative plant cover is an important aspect of control as knotweed seedlings do not compete well with other vegetation. The British Nature Conservancy Council recommends cutting in late spring or summer followed by an application of glyphosate in the fall. At least two additional applications will be needed to control the regrowth. Biological - No biological control options are currently available. NATIVE ALTERNATIVES FOR REVEGETATION OF STREAM BANKS The following species are suggested for establishing native plant cover after knotweed has been removed: shrubs - winterberry holly (Ilex verticillata), spicebush (Lindera benzoin), buttonbush (Cephalanthus occidentalis), silky willow (Salix sericea), pussy willow (Salix discolor), American elderberry (Sambucus canadensis), alder (Alnus serrulata and A. incana ssp. rugosa); herbaceous species- riverbank rye (Elymus riparius), wild-rye (Elymus villosus), big bluestem (Andropogon gerardii), switch grass (Panicum virgatum), wingstem (Verbesina alternifolia), joe-pye-weed (Eupatorium fistulosum and E. maculatum), boneset (Eupatorium perfoliatum). REFERENCES McCormick, L. H. and T. W. Bowersox. 1998. Eradication and control of Japanese knotweed at the Staple Bend Unit, Allegheny Portage Railroad National Historic Site. Penn State School of Forest Resources, University Park, PA. Niewinski, A. T., T. W. Bowersox, and L. H. McCormick. 1999. Reproductive ecology of giant (Polygonum sachalinensis) and Japanese (Polygonum cuspidatum) knotweed. National Park Service Technical Report NPS/PHSO/NRTR-00/079. University Park, PA. Reeder, Kathleen Kodish and Brian Eick. 2001. Northeast parks' regional strategy to control knotweed. Park Science 21: 33-35. Rhoads, Ann Fowler and Timothy A. Block. 2000. The Plants of Pennsylvania: An Illustrated Manual. University of Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia, PA. Rhoads, Ann Fowler and William McKinley Klein. 1993. The Vascular Flora of Pennsylvania: Annotated Checklist and Atlas. American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA. Internet resources – http://www.paflora.org, http://www.invasivespecies.gov, http://tncweeds.ucdavis.edu Invasive species fact sheet prepared by: Ann F. Rhoads and Timothy A. Block Morris Arboretum of the University of Pennsylvania 100 Northwestern Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19118 April 2002
20 May 2005 Page 1 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: MULTIFLORA ROSE
Multiflora Rose Rosa multiflora Thunb. Rose family (Rosaceae) NATIVE RANGE Japan, Korea, and eastern China DESCRIPTION Multiflora rose is a thorny, perennial shrub with arching stems (canes), and leaves divided into five to eleven sharply toothed leaflets. The base of each leaf stalk bears a pair of fringed bracts. Beginning in May or June, clusters of showy, fragrant, white to pink flowers appear, each about an inch across. Small bright red fruits, or rose hips, develop during the summer, becoming leathery, and remain on the plant through the winter. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Multiflora rose is extremely prolific and can form impenetrable thickets that exclude native plant species. This exotic rose readily invades open woodlands, forest edges, successional fields, savannas and prairies that have been subjected to land disturbance.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES Multiflora rose occurs throughout the U.S., with the exception of the Rocky Mountains, the southeastern Coastal Plain and the deserts of California and Nevada. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Multiflora rose has a wide tolerance for various soil, moisture, and light conditions. It occurs in dense woods, prairies, along stream banks and roadsides and in open fields and pastures. BACKGROUND
Multiflora rose was introduced to the East Coast from Japan in 1866 as rootstock for ornamental roses. Beginning in the 1930s, the U.S. Soil Conservation Service promoted it for use in erosion control and as "living fences" to confine livestock. State conservation departments soon discovered value in multiflora rose as wildlife cover for pheasant, bobwhite quail, and cottontail rabbit and as food for songbirds and encouraged its use by distributing rooted cuttings to landowners free of charge. More recently, multiflora rose has been planted in highway median strips to serve as crash barriers and to reduce automobile headlight glare. Its tenacious and unstoppable growth habit was eventually recognized as a problem on pastures and unplowed lands, where it disrupted cattle grazing. For these reasons, multiflora rose is classified as a noxious weed in several states, including Iowa, Ohio, West Virginia, and New Jersey. BIOLOGY & SPREAD Multiflora rose reproduces by seed and by forming new plants that root from the tips of arching canes that contact the ground. Fruits are readily sought after by birds which are the primary dispersers of its seed. It has been estimated that an average multiflora rose plant may produce a million seeds per year, which may remain viable in the soil for up to twenty years. Germination of multiflora rose seeds is enhanced by passing through the digestive tract of birds.
20 May 2005 Page 2 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Mechanical and chemical methods are currently the most widely used methods for managing multiflora rose. Frequent, repeated cutting or mowing at the rate of three to six times per growing season, for two to four years, has been shown to be effective in achieving high mortality of multiflora rose. In high quality natural communities, cutting of individual plants is preferred to site mowing to minimize habitat disturbance. Various herbicides have been used successfully in controlling multiflora rose but, because of the long-lived stores of seed in the soil, follow-up treatments are likely to be necessary. Application of systemic herbicides (e.g., glyphosate) to freshly cut stumps or to regrowth may be the most effective
methods, especially if conducted late in the growing season. Plant growth regulators have been used to control the spread of multiflora rose by preventing fruit set. Biological Biological control is not yet available for management of multiflora rose. However, researchers are investigating several options, including a native viral pathogen (rose-rosette disease), which is spread by a tiny native mite, and a seed-infesting wasp, the European rose chalcid. Rose-rosette disease, native to the western U.S., has been spreading easterwardly at a slow pace and is thought to hold the potential for eliminating multiflora rose in areas where it grows in dense patches. An important drawback to both the rose rosette virus and the European rose chalcid is their potential impact to other rose species and cultivars.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
CONTACTS For more information on multiflora rose management, please contact:
• Robert J. Richardson, Aquatic and Noncropland Weed Management, Crop Science Department, Box 7620, North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC 27695-7620, (919) 515-5653, Rob_Richardson at ncsu.edu
SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS Using native shrubs and trees for land restoration and landscaping purposes is one way to prevent invasions by multiflora rose. OTHER LINKS
• http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Rosa%20multiflora
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=29 AUTHORS Carole Bergmann, Montgomery County Department of Parks, Silver Spring, MD Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Washington, DC PHOTOGRAPHS John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA Barry A. Rice, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA REFERENCES Albaugh, G.P., W.H. Mitchell, and J.C. Graham. 1977. Evaluation of glyphosate for multiflora rose control. Proceedings of
the New England Weed Science Society, vol. 31, pp. 283-291. Amrine, J.W., Jr. and T.A. Stasny. 1993. Biological control of multiflora rose. Pp. 9-21. In McKnight, B.N.(ed.). Biological
Pollution. Indiana Acad. Sci., Indianapolis. 261 pp.
20 May 2005 Page 3 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
Evans, J.E. 1983. A literature review of management practices for multiflora rose (Rosa multiflora). Natural Areas Journal
3(1):6-15. Fawcett, R.S. 1980. Today's weed--multiflora rose. Weeds Today 11: 22-23. Szafone, R. 1991. Vegetation Management Guidelines: Multiflora rose (Rosa multiflora Thunb.). Natural Areas Journal
11(4):215-216. The Nature Conservancy. Multiflora Rose: Element Stewardship Abstract. In: Wildland Weeds Management & Research
Program, Weeds on the Web. Wyman, D. 1949. Shrubs and vines for American gardens. New York: MacMillan Co., 613 pp.
20 May 2005 Page 1 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: JAPANESE BARBERRY
Japanese Barberry Berberis thunbergii DC. Barberry family (Berberidaceae) NATIVE RANGE Japan DESCRIPTION Japanese barberry is a dense, deciduous, spiny shrub that grows 2 to 8 ft. high. The branches are brown, deeply grooved, somewhat zig-zag in form and bear a single very sharp spine at each node. The leaves are small (½ to 1 ½ inches long), oval to spatula-shaped, green, bluish-green, or dark reddish purple. Flowering occurs from mid-April to May in the northeastern U.S. Pale yellow flowers about ¼ in (0.6 cm) across hang in umbrella-shaped clusters of 2-4 flowers each along the length of the stem. The fruits are bright red berries about 1/3 in (1 cm) long that are borne on narrow stalks. They mature during late summer and fall and persist through the winter. NOTE: Japanese barberry may be confused with American barberry (Berberis canadensis), the only native species of barberry in North America, and common or European barberry (Berberis vulgaris) which is an introduced, sometimes invasive plant. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Japanese barberry forms dense stands in natural habitats including canopy forests, open woodlands, wetlands, pastures, and meadows and alters soil pH, nitrogen levels, and biological activity in the soil. Once established, barberry displaces native plants and reduces wildlife habitat and forage. White-tailed deer apparently avoid browsing barberry, preferring to feed on native plants, giving barberry a competitive advantage. In New Jersey, Japanese barberry has been found to raise soil pH (i.e., make it more basic) and reduce the depth of the litter layer in forests.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES Japanese barberry has been reported to be invasive in twenty states and the District of Columbia. Due to its ornamental interest, barberry is still widely propagated and sold by nurseries for landscaping purposes in many parts of the U.S. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Barberry is shade tolerant, drought resistant, and adaptable to a variety of open and wooded habitats, wetlands and disturbed areas. It prefers to grow in full sun to part shade but will flower and fruit even in heavy shade.
BACKGROUND Japanese barberry was introduced to the U.S. and New England as an ornamental plant in 1875 in the form of seeds sent from Russia to the Arnold Arboretum in Boston, Massachusetts. In 1896, barberry shrubs grown from these seeds were planted at the New York Botanic Garden. Japanese barberry was later promoted as a substitute for common barberry (Berberis vulgaris) which was planted by settlers for hedgerows, dye and jam, and later found to be a host for the black stem grain rust. Because Japanese barberry has been cultivated for ornamental purposes for many years, a number of cultivars exist.
20 May 2005 Page 2 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
BIOLOGY & SPREAD Japanese barberry spreads by seed and by vegetative expansion. Barberry produces large numbers of seeds which have a high germination rate, estimated as high as 90%. Barberry seed is transported to new locations with the help of birds (e.g., turkey and ruffed grouse) and small mammals which eat it. Birds frequently disperse seed while perched on powerlines or on trees at forest edges. Vegetative spread is through branches touching the ground that can root to form new plants and root fragments remaining in the soil that can sprout to form new plants. MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Do not plant Japanese barberry. Because it is a prolific seed-producer with a high germination rate, prevention of seed production should be a management priority. Because barberry can resprout from root fragments remaining in soil, thorough removal of root portions is important. Manual control works well but may need to be combined with chemical in large or persistent infestions. Biological No biological control organisms are available for this plant. Chemical Treatments using the systemic herbicides glyphosate (e.g., Roundup®) and triclopyr (e.g., Garlon®) have been effective in managing Japanese barberry infestations that are too large for hand pulling. For whole plant treatment, apply a 2% solution of glyphosate mixed with water and a surfactant. This non-selective herbicide should be used with care to avoid impacting non-target native plants. Application early in the season before native vegetation has matured may minimize non-target impacts. However, application in late summer during fruiting may be most effective. Triclopyr or glyphosphate may be used on cut stumps or as a basal bark application in a 25% solution with water, covering the outer 20% of the stump. Manual Because Japanese barberry leafs out early, it is easy to identify and begin removal efforts in early spring. Small plants can be pulled by hand, using thick gloves to avoid injury from the spines. The root system is shallow making it easy to pull plants from the ground, and it is important to get the entire root system. The key is to pull when the soil is damp and loose. Young plants can be dug up individually using a hoe or shovel. Hand pulling and using a shovel to remove plants up to about 3 ft high is effective if the root system is loosened up around the primary tap root first before digging out the whole plant. Mechanical Mechanical removal using a hoe or Weed Wrench® can be very effective and may pose the least threat to non-target species and the general environment at the site. Tools like the Weed Wrench® are helpful for uprooting larger or older shrubs. Shrubs can also be mowed or cut repeatedly. If time does not allow for complete removal of barberry plants at a site, mowing or cutting in late summer prior to seed production is advisable.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
CONTACTS For more information on the management of Japanese barberry, please contact:
• Ian Shackleford, Ottawa National Forest, E6248 U.S.2, Ironwood, MI 49938; (906) 932-1330 x508
• Jessica Murray, Ecological Restoration Coordinator, Berkshire Taconic Landscape Program, The Nature Conservancy, PO Box 268, Sheffield, MA 01262; (413) 229-0232 x228; jmurray at tnc.org
SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS Many attractive native shrubs are available that make great substitutes for Japanese barberry. A few examples include bayberry (Myrica pensylvanica), ink-berry (Ilex glabra), winterberry (Ilex verticillata), arrow-wood (Viburnum dentatum), mountain laurel (Kalmia latifolia), ninebark (Physocarpus opulifolius) and hearts-a-bustin' (Euonymus americana). Please check with your state native plant nursery for suggestions for plants appropriate to your area.
20 May 2005 Page 3 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
OTHER LINKS
• http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Berberis%20thunbergii
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=26 AUTHOR Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Center for Urban Ecology, Washington, DC REVIEWERS Sylvan Kaufman, Conservation Curator, Adkins Arboretum, Ridgely, MD PHOTOGRAPH Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Center for Urban Ecology, Washington, DC REFERENCES Ehrenfeld, J. G. 1997. Invasion of deciduous forest preserves in the New York metropolitan region by Japanese barberry
(Berberis thunbergii DC.) Journal of the Torrey Botanical Society. 124: 210-215. Ehrenfeld, J. G. 1999. Structure and dynamics of populations of Japanese barberry (Berberis thunbergii DC.) in deciduous
forests of New Jersey. Biological Invasions 1: 203-213. Invasive Plant Atlas of New England. 2004. University of Connecticut.
http://webapps.lib.uconn.edu/ipane/browsing.cfm?descriptionid=26 Kourtev, P.S., W. Z. Huang, and J. G. Ehrenfeld. 1999. Differences in earthworm densities and nitrogen dynamics in soils
under exotic and native plant species. Biological Invasions 1: 237-245. McDonald, Brian (personal communication with Sylvan Kaufman). Rhoads, A.F. and T. Blcok. 2002. Japanese barberry (Berberis thunbergii DC.). Morris Arboretum of the University of
Pennsylvania, Philadelphia PA. 3 pp. Shackleford, Ian (personal communication with Sylvan Kaufman). Silander, J. A. and D. M. Klepeis. 1999. The invasion ecology of Japanese barberry (Berberis thunbergii) in the New
England landscape. Biological Invasions 1: 189-201. Swearingen, J. 2004. WeedUS: Database of Invasive Plants of Natural Areas in the U.S. (in progress)
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien USDA Plants Database. http://plants.usda.gov/
winged euonymus - page 1 of 3
Winged Euonymus (burning-bush, winged wahoo, winged spindle-tree, Japanese spindle-tree)
Euonymus alatus (Thunb.) Siebold Staff-tree Family (Celastraceae)
DESCRIPTION Winged euonymus is a deciduous shrub that is native to China and Japan. Height - It is relatively fast-growing reaching a height (and width) of 15–20 feet. Compact forms that reach only 5–10 feet are common in the nursery trade. Bark - The bark is gray-brown and the stems usually have 2–4 prominent, corky wings. In some cultivars, these wings can be reduced to mere ridges. Buds - The leaf buds are brownish-green, and strongly divergent.
Leaves - The leaves are opposite, elliptic, and measure 1–3 inches long and ½–1½ inches wide with fine, sharp serrations on the margin. In autumn the dark green leaves turn brilliant purplish-red to scarlet before dropping; the color is less intense on plants growing in the shade. Flowers - In Pennsylvania the flowers bloom in late April in the south to late June in northern counties. The flowers are small, yellowish green in color, and inconspicuous. Fruit - The smooth, purplish fruits are ½ inch-long capsules that split open in September and October exposing four red to orange seeds, which are eaten by birds. Roots - Winged euonymus has a dense, fibrous root system. DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT Winged euonymus was introduced into the USA from northeastern Asia about 1860 for use as an ornamental shrub and is hardy to USDA Zone 4. The bright red fall foliage makes this shrub a popular ornamental; it is commonly planted along interstate highways, as hedges, and in foundation plantings. While it behaves well in urban areas, burning-bush planted near woodlands, mature second-growth forests, and pastures can be a problem. It has escaped from
winged euonymus in fruit
winged twig
winged euonymus - page 2 of 3
cultivation in the Northeast and Midwest, notably in Connecticut, Virginia, Pennsylvania, and Illinois. The earliest evidence of naturalized populations of winged euonymus in eastern Pennsylvania dates from the 1960s. Today it is found with increasing frequency in moist forests throughout eastern counties. EFFECTS OF INVASION Winged euonymus is a threat to mature forests and successional fields and woodlands because it out-competes native species. It is adaptable to various environmental conditions although it generally does not do well in very dry areas. It grows well in a variety of soil types and pH levels, has no serious pest problems in North America, and most importantly of all, is tolerant of full shade. It has invaded moist forested sites creating dense thickets that can shade out native herbs and shrubs. REPRODUCTION AND METHODS OF DISPERSAL Seed production is prodigious; many germinate where they fall close to the mother plant creating dense beds of seedlings. Others are spread by birds that are attracted to the seeds by their nutritious, fleshy, red covering (aril). Seeds dispersed this way germinate easily and spread the infestation rapidly. Wide usage of this a popular landscape ornamental increases the probability that more will escape from cultivation. CONTROL Mechanical - Seedlings up to 2 feet tall can be easily hand-pulled, especially when the soil is moist, due to the fibrous root system. Larger plants can be dug out with a spading fork or pulled with a weed wrench. Larger shrubs can be cut down, but the stump must be ground out or the re-growth clipped. Chemical - The cut stump can also be painted with glyphosate immediately after cutting, following the label directions. Where populations are so large that cutting or pulling are impractical, glyphosate may be applied as a foliar spray. This treatment is most effective during the early summer months. Biological - No biological control options are available at this time. LANDSCAPE ALTERNATIVES Winged euonymus is a very popular landscape ornamental; however, it should not be planted anywhere near native forest stands because of its invasiveness and prolific seed production. The following native shrubs are suggested as alternatives: winterberry holly (Ilex verticillata), red chokeberry (Aronia arbutifolia), Virginia sweetspire (Itea virginica), arrow-wood (Viburnum recognitum or V. dentatum), blackhaw (Viburnum prunifolium), gray dogwood (Cornus racemosa), kinnikinik (Cornus amomum), ninebark (Physocarpus opulifolius), witch-hazel (Hamamelis virginiana), bayberry (Myrica pensylvanica).
winged euonymus - page 3 of 3
REFERENCES Rhoads, Ann Fowler and Timothy A. Block. 2000. The Plants of Pennsylvania: An Illustrated Manual. University of Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia, PA. Rhoads, Ann Fowler and William McKinley Klein. 1993. The Vascular Flora of Pennsylvania: Annotated Checklist and Atlas. American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA. Internet resources - http://www.upenn.edu/paflora, http://www.invasivespecies.gov, http://tncweeds.ucdavis.edu
Invasive species fact sheet prepared by: Ann F. Rhoads and Timothy A. Block Morris Arboretum of the University of Pennsylvania 100 Northwestern Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19118 April 2002
20 May 2005 Page 1 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: GIANT REED
Common Reed Phragmites australis (Cav.) Trin. ex Steud. Grass family (Poaceae) NATIVE RANGE Eurasia DESCRIPTION Common reed, or Phragmites, is a tall, perennial grass that can grow to over 15 feet in height. In North America, both native phragmites (Phragmites australis ssp. americanus Saltonstall, P.M. Peterson & Soreng) and introduced subspecies are found. Introduced Phragmites forms dense stands which include both live stems and standing dead stems from previous year’s growth. Leaves are elongate and typically 1-1.5 inches wide at their widest point. Flowers form bushy panicles in late July and August and are usually purple or golden in color. As seeds mature, the panicles begin to look “fluffy” due to the hairs on the seeds and they take on a grey sheen. Below ground, Phragmites forms a dense network of roots and rhizomes which can go down several feet in depth. The plant spreads horizontally by sending out rhizome runners which can grow 10 or more feet in a single growing season if conditions are optimal. Please see the table below for information on distinguishing betweeen native and introduced Phragmites. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Once introduced Phragmites invades a site it quickly can take over a marsh community, crowding out native plants, changing marsh hydrology, altering wildlife habitat, and increasing fire potential. Its high biomass blocks light to other plants and occupies all the growing space belowground so plant communities can turn into a Phragmites monoculture very quickly. Phragmites can spread both by seed dispersal and by vegetative spread via fragments of rhizomes that break off and are transported elsewhere. New populations of the introduced type may appear sparse for the first few years of growth but due to the plant’s rapid growth rate, they will typically form a pure stand that chokes out other vegetation very quickly.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES Phragmites occurs throughout the lower 48 states and southern Canada. It has been reported to be invasive in natural areas in 18 states including Colorado, Connecticut, Delaware, Georgia, Indiana, Kentucky, Maryland, Michigan, North Carolina, New Hampshire, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania, Tennessee, Virginia, Vermont, and Wisconsin, and the District of Columbia. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Tidal and nontidal brackish and freshwater marshes, river edges, shores of lakes and ponds, roadsides, disturbed areas.
BACKGROUND Preserved remains of native Phragmites that are 40,000 years old have been found in the southwest indicating that it is a part of the native flora of that region. In coastal areas, preserved rhizome fragments dating back 3000-4000 years have also been found in salt marsh sediments indicating that it is also native to these habitats. Native American uses of Phragmites include use of stems for arrow shafts, musical instruments, ceremonial objects, cigarettes, and both leaves and stems for constructing mats.
20 May 2005 Page 2 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
Introduced Phragmites is thought to have arrived in North America accidentally, most likely in ballast material in the late 18th or early 19th centuries. It established itself along the Atlantic coast and over the course of the 20th century, spread across the continent. In Europe Phragmites is grown commercially and is used for thatching, fodder for livestock, and cellulose production. It is also declining in parts of Europe which has been of concern to natural resource managers there. Here in the United States it is not used for many purposes. BIOLOGY & SPREAD While each Phragmites plant may produce thousands of seeds annually, seed viability is typically low although there appears to be a great deal of interannual variation in fecundity. Dispersal to new sites is typically by seed except along rivers and shorelines where fragments of rhizomes may be washed down to new sites where they can establish. Along roadsides, rhizomes fragments may also be transported by heavy machinery between sites. At this time, there is no evidence for hybrid native/introduced populations occurring in the field. MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Areas with large, established, populations of Phragmites are best restored using herbicides. Other options include mowing and prescribed burning. Biological At this time no means of biological control are available in the United States for treating Phragmites infestations. Chemical Glyphosate-based herbicides (e.g., Rodeo®) are the most effective control method for established populations. If a population can be controlled soon after it has established chances of success are much higher because the below-ground rhizome network will not be as extensive. Herbicides are best applied in late summer/early fall after the plant has flowered either as a cut stump treatment or as a foliar spray. It is often necessary to do repeated treatments for several years to prevent any surviving rhizomes from resprouting. When applying herbicides in or around water or wetlands, be sure to use products labeled for that purpose to avoid harm to aquatic organisms. Fire Prescribed burning after the plant has flowered, either alone or in combination with herbicide treatment, may also be effective. Burning after herbicide treatment also reduces standing dead stem and litter biomass which may help to encourage germination of native plants in the following growing season. Plants should not be burned in the spring or summer before flowering as this may stimulate growth. Mechanical This type of control (e.g., repeated mowing) may be effective at slowing the spread of established stands but is unlikely to kill the plant. Excavation of sediments may also be effective at control but if small fragments of root are left in the soil, they may lead to reestablishment.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
CONTACTS For more information on identification and control of Phragmites, contact:
• Dr. Kristin Saltonstall, Adjunct Research Scientist, Horn Point Laboratory, University of Maryland Center for Environmental Science, (914) 526-2498, ksalton at hpl.umces.edu
SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS Native plant species that are adapted to local conditions should be used in restoration projects and as a substitute for Phragmites erosion control practices.
20 May 2005 Page 3 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
How to Distinguish Native and Introduced Phragmites plants: It can be difficult to definitively distinguish native from introduced Phragmites plants without genetic testing due to the plasticity of the species and its ability to adapt to a wide range of conditions. However, a number of morphological characteristics have now been identified that can be used to determine a population’s type. These characters can be subtle (e.g. color variation) and subjective making positive identification difficult. Given this, an assignment of native or introduced status to a population should not be made unless several characters clearly match the patterns shown in table 1. Table 1: Morphological characters useful in distinguishing Native and Introduced Phragmites populations.*
CHARACTER Photo
NATIVE INTRODUCED
Ligule width**
1.0-1.7 mm 0.4-0.9 mm
Lower glume length 3.0-6.5 mm 2.5-5.0 mm
Upper glume length 5.5-11.0 mm 4.5-7.5 mm
Adherence of leaf sheaths** Loose – both leaves and leaf sheaths are usually dropped as the plant senesces
Tight – leaves may drop off but leaf sheaths typically adhere tightly to dead stems
20 May 2005 Page 4 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
CHARACTER Photo
NATIVE INTRODUCED
Stem color (look under the leaf sheaths, especially in places where the stem is exposed to sunlight)
Summer – green to maroon, may have maroon color at the nodes only Winter – yellow to brown
Summer – typically all green with yellowish nodes although some lower nodes may have maroon color Winter – yellow
Stem spots Small round fungal spots MAY be present in late summer and on dead stems
Extremely rare. Patches of black filamentous fungi may be seen
Stem density May occur as a monoculture, often co-occurs with other plant species
Typically grows as a monoculture, young newly established populations and those in areas of high salinity may be less dense
20 May 2005 Page 5 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
CHARACTER Photo
NATIVE INTRODUCED
Leaf color
Yellow-green – usually lighter than introduced
Blue-green in most habitats but may be yellow-green in brackish habitats
Habitat Undisturbed sites MidAtlantic – fresh to oligohaline tidal marshes Midwest – fens, marshes
Highly disturbed to undisturbed sites, dominates brackish marshes along the Atlantic coast, common along roadsides throughout the U.S.
* This table should not be used to distinguish between Phragmites populations along the Gulf Coast where another type of Phragmites, the Gulf Coast type, which looks similar to introduced Phragmites, is also found. ** Most reliable characters distinguishing native from introduced Phragmites. OTHER LINKS
• http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Phragmites%20australis
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=85
• http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/fact/pdf/phau1-powerpoint.pdf AUTHOR Dr. Kristin Saltonstall, Adjunct Research Scientist, Horn Point Laboratory University of Maryland Center for Environmental Science, Solomon, MD EDITOR Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Center for Urban Ecology, Washington, DC PHOTOGRAPHS Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Center for Urban Ecology, Washington, DC Dr. Kristin Saltonstall, Adjunct Research Scientist, Horn Point Laboratory University of Maryland Center for Environmental Science, Solomon, MD Robert Meadows, Environmental Scientist, North DE Wetland Rehabilitation Program, DE Mosquito Control Section, Newark, DE REFERENCES Chambers, R.M., L.A. Meyerson, and K. Saltonstall. 1999. Expansion of Phragmites australis into tidal wetlands of North
America. Aquatic Botany 64: 261-273.
20 May 2005 Page 6 of 6
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
Marks, M., B. Lapin, et al. 1994. Phragmites australis (P. communis): Threats, management, and monitoring. Natural Areas Journal 14: 285-294.
Meyerson, L.A., K. Saltonstall, L. Windham, E. Kiviat, and S. Findlay. 2000. A comparison of Phragmites australis in
freshwater and brackish marsh environments in North America. Wetlands Ecology and Management 8: 89-103. Norris, L., J. E. Perry, and K.J. Havens. 2002. A summary of methods for controlling Phragmites australis. Virginia
Institute of marine Science Wetlands Program Technical Report No. 02-2. Saltonstall, K. 2002. Cryptic invasion of a non-native genotype of the common reed, Phragmites australis, into North
America. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences USA 99(4): 2445-2449. Saltonstall, K. 2003. Microsatellite variation within and among North American lineages of Phragmites australis. Molecular
Ecology 12(7): 1689-1702. Saltonstall, K. 2003. Genetic variation among North American populations of Phragmites australis: implications for
management. Estuaries 26(2B):445-452. Saltonstall, K. 2003. A rapid method for identifying the origin of North American Phragmites populations using RFLP
analysis. Wetlands 23(4) 1043-1047. Saltonstall, K., P.M. Peterson, and R. Soreng. 2004. Recognition of Phragmites australis subsp. americanus (Poaceae:
Arundinoideae) in North America: evidence from morphological and genetic analyses. Sida. Swearingen, J. 2005. Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas. Plant Conservation Alliance, Alien Plant Working Group.
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/list/a.htm U.S.Department of Agriculture. 2005. Natural Resources Conservation Service Plants Database. http://plants.usda.gov/
20 May 2005 Page 1 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: COMMON BUCKTHORN
Common Buckthorn Rhamnus cathartica L. Buckthorn family (Rhamnaceae) NATIVE RANGE Eurasia DESCRIPTION Common buckthorn is a shrub or small tree that can grow to 22 feet in height and have a trunk up to 10 inches wide. The crown shape of mature plants is spreading and irregular. The bark is gray to brown, rough textured when mature and may be confused with that of plum trees in the genus Prunus. When cut, the inner bark is yellow and the heartwood, pink to orange. Twigs are often tipped with a spine. In spring, dense clusters of 2 to 6, yellow-green, 4-petaled flowers emerge from stems near the bases of leaf stalks. Male and female flowers are borne on separate plants. Small black fruits about ¼ inch in cross-section and containing 3-4 seeds, form in the fall. Leaves are broadly oval, rounded or pointed at the tip, with 3-4 pairs of upcurved veins, and have jagged, toothed margins. The upper and lower leaf surfaces are without hairs. Leaves appear dark, glossy green on the upper surface and stay green late into fall, after most other deciduous leaves have fallen. A similar problem exotic species is Rhamnus frangula, glossy buckthorn. Glossy buckthorn does not have a spine at twig tips, leaves are not toothed, and the undersides of the leaves are hairy. NOTE: Several native American buckthorns that occur in the eastern U.S. that could be confused with the exotic species. If in doubt, consult with a knowledgeable botanist to get an accurate identification. Carolina buckthorn (Rhamnus caroliniana), is a lovely native shrub that has finely toothed leaves somewhat resembling those of black cherry, and are smooth on the underside; it produces attractive fruits from August to October. Alder buckthorn (Rhamnus alnifolia), is a low-growing shrub that may grow to a maximum of 3 feet in height, and has leaves with 6-7 pairs of veins. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Exotic buckthorns tend to form dense, even-aged thickets, crowding and shading out native shrubs and herbs, often completely obliterating them. Dense buckthorn seedlings prevent native tree and shrub regeneration. In fire-adapted ecosystems such as savannas and prairies, the lack of vegetation under buckthorn prohibits fires. Buckthorn control is also of interest to small grain producers; the shrub is an alternate host of the crown rust of oats, which affects oat yield and quality.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES Common buckthorn has become naturalized from Nova Scotia to Saskatchewan, south to Missouri, and east to New England. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Common buckthorn prefers lightly shaded conditions. An invader mainly of open oak woods, deadfall openings in woodlands, and woods edges, it may also be found in prairies and open fields. It is tolerant of many soil types, well drained sand, clay, poorly drained calcareous, neutral or alkaline, wet or dry.
20 May 2005 Page 2 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
BACKGROUND Common buckthorn was introduced to North America as an ornamental shrub, for fence rows, and wildlife habitat. Introduction of buckthorn was based on its hardiness and ability to thrive in a variety of soil and light conditions. BIOLOGY & SPREAD Common buckthorn is a dioecious plant, meaning that each plant produces only male or female flowers and fruiting trees are always female. Most of the fruits fall directly beneath the shrubs, creating a dense understory of seedlings characteristic of common buckthorn stands. The plentiful fruit is eaten by birds and mice and is known to produce a severe laxative effect, helping distribute seeds through birds, often far from the parent plant. Buckthorn often establishes beneath trees at the edges of forests and fields. MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Mechanical, physical and chemical methods are available for control of common buckthorn and glossy buckthorn (Rhamnus frangula), also an invasive exotic plant. Prescribed fire is one method proposed for controlling buckthorn seedlings in fire-adapted natural areas, from late March to early May, most recently by Boudreau and Willson. In the upper Midwest conduct burns as soon as leaf litter is dry; resprouts will be less vigorous due to low carbohydrate levels. Burning every year or every other year in established stands may be required for 5-6 years or more. Unfortunately, buckthorn seedings often grow in low litter areas, unsuitable for frequent prescribed fire. In dense stands, seedlings and saplings may be cut and dropped on site, creating fuel for future fires. Buckthorn seedlings appear vulnerable to fire, perhaps due to their poorly established root structure. Fire will top kill a mature plant, but resprouting does occur. Uprooting of ½ inch diameter seedlings by hand or up to 1 ½ inch diameter using a weed wrench is effective, but care should be taken to avoid excessive disturbance to the soil, which can release buckthorn seeds stored in the soil. Chemical Careful application of herbicides has been found to effectively control buckthorn in Illinois. The McHenry County, Illinois, Conservation District (MCICD) reports excellent results using a triclopyr herbicide at the rate of 1:4 herbicide:water with dye on cut stumps during the growing season, from late May to October. The product label suggests avoiding treatment during the spring sap flow. To extend the work season, the use of a triclopyr herbicide was also applied to cut stumps during winter and was reported to be effective by MCICD and the Minnesota Region V State Parks. Frill application (applying herbicide into the cambial layer of fresh cuts on the tree trunk) using the 1:4 rate of triclopyr herbicide with oil and dye was also effective. Experiments at the University of Wisconsin Arboretum report good results using a mixture of 1 part triclopyr herbicide to 7 parts oil on cut stumps, or a 1 part triclopyr herbicide to 16 parts oil mixture applied as a basal bark treatment to stems less than 3 inches across. For fall applications, the Minnesota Department of Natural Resources, Region V State Parks Resource Management has used a 1 part glyphosate herbicide to 5 parts water mixture applied immediately to cut stumps using a hand sprayer. Initial checks indicated over 85 percent control at the test site.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS For home landscaping and wildlife plantings many native low trees and shrubs are available from commercial nurseries. Examples include American elder (Sambucus canadensis), Black chokeberry (Aronia melanocarpa), and Juneberry (Amelanchier alnifolia). Please contact your local native plant society for recommendations of plants native to your particular area.
20 May 2005 Page 3 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
OTHER LINKS • http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Rhamnus%20cathartica
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=24 AUTHOR Susan Wieseler, Minnesota Department of Natural Resources, Rochester, MN EDITOR Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Washington, DC PHOTOGRAPHS John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA REFERENCES Archibold, O. W., D. Brooks, and L. Delanoy. 1997. An investigation of the invasive shrub European Buckthorn, Rhamnus
cathartica L., near Saskatoon, Saskatchewan. Canadian Field Naturalist 111(4): 617-621. Boudreau, D., and G. Willson. 1992. Buckthorn research and control at Pipestone National Monument (Minnesota).
Restoration and Management Notes 10:1 94-95. Converse, C. 1985. Element Stewardship Abstract, Rhamnus cathartica. The Nature Conservancy. Glass, S. 1994. Experiment finds less herbicide needed to control Buckthorn (Wisconsin). Restoration and Management
Notes 12:1 93.
2 May 2006 Page 1 of 4
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: ORIENTAL BITTERSWEET
Oriental Bittersweet Celastrus orbiculatus Thunb. Staff-tree family (Celastraceae) NATIVE RANGE Eastern Asia, Korea, China and Japan DESCRIPTION Oriental bittersweet is a deciduous woody perennial plant which grows as a climbing vine and a trailing shrub. Stems of older plants 4 inches in diameter have been reported. The leaves are alternate, glossy, nearly as wide as they are long (round), with finely toothed margins. There are separate female (fruiting) and male (non-fruiting) plants. Female plants produce clusters of small greenish flowers in axillary clusters (from most leaf axils), and each plant can produce large numbers of fruits and seeds. The fruits are three-valved, yellow, globular capsules that at maturity split open to reveal three red-orange, fleshy arils each containing one or two seeds. The abundance of showy fruits have made Oriental bittersweet extremely popular for use in floral arrangements. NOTE: Because Oriental bittersweet can be confused with our native American bittersweet (Celastrus scandens) which is becoming less and less common, it is imperative that correct identification be made before any control is begun. American bittersweet produces flowers (and fruits) in single terminal panicles at the tips of the stems; flower panicles and fruit clusters are about as long as the leaves; the leaves are nearly twice as long as wide and are tapered at each end. Oriental bittersweet produces flowers in small axillary clusters that are shorter than the subtending leaves and the leaves are very rounded. Comparing the two, American bittersweet has fewer, larger clusters of fruits whereas Oriental bittersweet is a prolific fruiter with lots and lots of fruit clusters emerging at many points along the stem. Unfortunately, hybrids of the two occur which may make identification more difficult. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Oriental bittersweet is a vigorously growing vine that climbs over and smothers vegetation which may die from excessive shading or breakage. When bittersweet climbs high up on trees the increased weight can lead to uprooting and blow-over during high winds and heavy snowfalls. In addition, Oriental bittersweet is displacing our native American bittersweet (Celastrus scandens) through competition and hybridization.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES Oriental bittersweet currently occurs in a number of states from New York to North Carolina, and westward to Illinois. It has been reported to be invasive in natural areas in 21 states (CT, DE, IL, IN, KY, MA, MD, ME, MI, MO, NC, NH, NJ, NY, PA, RI, TN, VA, VT, WI, and WV) and at least 14 national parks in the eastern U.S. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Oriental bittersweet infests forest edges, woodlands, fields, hedgerows, coastal areas and salt marsh edges, particularly those suffering some form of land disturbance. While often found in more open, sunny sites, its tolerance for
shade allows oriental bittersweet to invade forested areas. BACKGROUND Introduced into the U.S. in the 1860s as an ornamental plant, oriental bittersweet is often associated with old homesites, from which it has escaped into surrounding natural areas. Oriental bittersweet is still widely planted and maintained as an ornamental vine, further promoting its spread.
2 May 2006 Page 2 of 4
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
BIOLOGY & SPREAD Oriental bittersweet reproduces prolifically by seed, which is readily dispersed to new areas by many species of birds including mockingbirds, blue jays and European starlings. The seeds germinate in late spring. It also expands vegetatively through root suckering. MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Manual, mechanical and chemical control methods are all effective in removing and killing Oriental bittersweet. Employing a combination of methods often yields the best results and may reduce potential impacts to native plants, animals and people. The method you select depends on the extent and type of infestation, the amount of native vegetation on the site, and the time, labor and other resources available to you. Whenever possible and especially for vines climbing up trees or buildings, a combination of cutting followed by application of concentrated systemic herbicide to rooted, living cut surfaces is likely to be the most effective approach. For large infestations spanning extensive areas of ground, a foliar herbicide may be the best choice rather than manual or mechanical means which could result in soil disturbance. Biological No biological controls are currently available for this plant. Chemical Systemic herbicides like triclopyr (e.g., Garlon® 3A and Garlon® 4) and glyphosate (e.g., Accord®, Glypro®, Rodeo®) are absorbed into plant tissues and carried to the roots, killing the entire plant within about a week. This method is most effective if the stems are first cut by hand or mowed and herbicide is applied immediately to cut stem tissue. Herbicide applications can be made any time of year as long as temperatures are above 55 or 60 degrees Fahrenheit for several days and rain is not expected for at least 24 hours. Fall and winter applications will avoid or minimize impacts to native plants and animals. Repeated treatments are likely to be needed. In areas where spring wildflowers or other native plants occur, application of herbicides should be conducted prior to their emergence, delayed until late summer or autumn, after the last killing frost occurs, or carefully targeted. Herbicidal contact with desirable plants should always be avoided. If native grasses are intermingled with the bittersweet, triclopyr should be used because it is selective for broad-leaved plants and will not harm grasses. Follow-up monitoring should be conducted to ensure effective control. Glyphosate products referred to in this fact sheet are sold under a variety of brand names (Accord®, Rodeo®, Roundup Pro® Concentrate) and in three concentrations (41.0, 50.2 and 53.8% active ingredient). Other glyphosate products sold at home improvement stores may be too dilute to obtain effective control. Triclopyr comes in two forms – triclopyr amine (e.g., Garlon® 3A, Brush-B-Gone®, Brush Killer®) and triclopyr ester (e.g., Garlon® 4, Pathfinder®, and Vinex®). Because Garlon® 3A is a water-soluble salt that can cause severe eye damage, it is imperative that you wear protective goggles to protect yourself from splashes. Garlon® 4 is soluble in oil or water, is highly volatile and can be extremely toxic to fish and aquatic invertebrates. It should not be used in or near water sources or wetlands and should only be applied under cool, calm conditions. Basal bark application Use a string trimmer or hand saw to remove some of the foliage in a band a few feet from the ground at comfortable height. To the exposed stems, apply a 20% solution of triclopyr ester (Garlon® 4) (2.5 quarts per 3-gallon mix) in commercially available basal oil with a penetrant (check with herbicide distributor) to vine stems. As much as possible, avoid application of herbicide to the bark of the host tree. This can be done year-round although efficacy may vary seasonally; temperatures should be above 50 degrees F for several days. Cut stem application Use this method in areas where vines are established within or around non-target plants or where vines have grown into the canopy. Cut each vine stem close to the ground (about 2 in. above ground) and immediately apply a 25% solution of glyphosate (e.g., Accord®) or triclopyr (e.g., Garlon® 3A) mixed with water to the cut surface of the stem. The glyphosate application is effective at temperatures as low as 40°F and a subsequent foliar application may be necessary. The triclopyr application remains effective at low temperatures (<60°F) as long as the ground is not frozen. A subsequent foliar application may be necessary to control new seedlings. Homeowners can apply products like Brush-B-Gone®, Brush Killer® and Roundup Pro® Concentrate undiluted to cut stems. Using a paint brush or a plastic spray bottle, apply herbicide to the cut surface.
2 May 2006 Page 3 of 4
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
Foliar application Use this method to control extensive patches of solid bittersweet. It may be necessary to precede foliar applications with stump treatments to reduce the risk of damaging non-target species. During foliar applications some of the herbicide is also absorbed through the stem for additional (basal bark) effect. Apply a 2% solution (8 oz per 3 gal. mix) triclopyr ester (Garlon® 4) or triclopyr amine (Garlon® 3A) mixed in water with a non-ionic surfactant to the leaves. In Rhode Island, concentrations as low as 1% in mid-summer and 0.05% in September have been very effective. Thoroughly wet the foliage but not to the point of runoff. The ideal time to spray is after much of the native vegetation has become dormant (October-November) to avoid affecting non-target species. A 0.5% concentration of a non-ionic surfactant is recommended in order to penetrate leaf cuticle. If the 2% rate is not effective try an increased rate of 3-5%. Ambient air temperature should be above 65°F. For dense, low patches of bittersweet another alternative is to cut the entire patch to the ground early in the growing season. About one month later, apply 1-2% solution of triclopyr ester (Garlon® 4) or triclopyr salt (Garlon® 3A) in water to the previously cut patch using a backpack sprayer. This method has resulted in complete rootkill of the bittersweet and no off-target damage or root uptake by adjacent plants. Manual and Mechanical Small infestations can be hand-pulled but the entire plant should be removed including all the root portions. If fruits are present, the vines should be bagged in plastic trash bags and disposed of in a landfill. Always wear gloves and long sleeves to protect your skin from poison ivy and barbed or spined plants. For climbing vines, first cut the vines near the ground at a comfortable height to kill upper portions and relieve the tree canopy. Vines can be cut using pruning snips or pruning saw for smaller stems or a hand axe or chain saw for larger vines. Try to minimize damage to the bark of the host tree. Rooted portions will remain alive and should be pulled, repeatedly cut to the ground or treated with herbicide. Cutting without herbicide treatment will require vigilance and repeated cutting because plants will resprout from the base.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
CONTACTS For more information on the management of Oriental bittersweet, please contact:
• Glenn D. Dreyer, glenn.dreyer at conncoll.edu, (860) 439-2144
• Sue Salmons, sue_salmons at nps.gov, (202) 342-1443 ext. 217
• Jil Swearingen, jil_swearingen at nps.gov, (202) 342-1443 ext. 218 SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS Several attractive native vines are available that provide nectar, seed and host plant material for butterflies, hummingbirds, and other wildlife. These include American bittersweet (Celastrus scandens) which is native to the eastern U.S. and should only be planted in areas where Oriental bittersweet is not well established or has been successfully controlled, to prevent hybridization with the native species. Other good alternatives include trumpet honeysuckle (Lonicera sempervirens), trumpet creeper (Campsis radicans), passionflower vine (Passiflora lutea), Dutchman's pipe (Aristolochia macrophylla) and native wisteria (Wisteria frutescens)*. *If you wish to plant wisteria, make certain that it is the native species. Two commonly planted ornamental wisterias, Chinese wisteria (Wisteria sinensis) and Japanese wisteria (Wisteria floribunda), are exotic and aggressive invaders. OTHER LINKS
• http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Celastrus%20orbiculatus
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=27 AUTHOR Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Washington, DC
2 May 2006 Page 4 of 4
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
REVIEWERS Glenn D. Dreyer PHOTOGRAPH Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Washington, DC REFERENCES Dirr, Michael A. 1990. Manual of wody landscape plants: their identification, ornamental characteristics, culture,
propagation and uses. Stipes Publishing Company, Champaign, IL. Dreyer, G. 1988. Efficacy of triclopyr in rootkilling Oriental bittersweet and certain other woody weeds. Proceedings of the
Northeastern Weed Science Society Vol. 42:120-121. Gleason, H.A. and A. Cronquist. 1991. Manual of vascular plants of northeastern United States and adjacent Canada, 2nd
ed. New York Botanical Garden. pp 328-9. Harty, Francis M. 1993. How Illinois kicked the exotic species habit. Pp. 195-209. In B.N. McKnight (ed.), Biological
Pollution, Indiana Acad. Sci., Indianapolis, IN. 261 pp. Hutchinson, M. 1992. Vegetation management guideline: round-leaved bittersweet (Celastrus orbiculatus). Natural Areas
Journal 12:161. McNab, W.H. and M. Meeker. 1987. Oriental bittersweet: a growing threat to hard-wood silviculture in the Appalachians.
Northern Journal of Applied Forestry 4:174-177. Shepard, C. 1996. Invasive Plant Information Sheet: Asiatic Bittersweet (Celastrus orbiculatus Thunb.). The Nature
Conservancy, Connecticut Chapter, Hartford, CT. Southeast Exotic Pest Plant Council. 2003. Invasive Plant Manual. http://www.invasive.org/eastern/eppc/bittersweet.html Swearingen, J. 2006. WeedUS: Database of Plants Invading Natural Areas in the U.S.
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/list/all.htm The Nature Conservancy. Oriental Bittersweet: Element Stewardship Abstract. In: Wildland Weeds Management &
Research Program, Weeds on the Web. http://tncweeds.ucdavis.edu/esadocs/celaorbi.html U.S.Department of Agriculture. 2006. Plants Profile: Celastrus orbiculatus. Natural Resources Conservation Service,
Plants Database. http://plants.usda.gov/java/nameSearch?keywordquery=celastrus+orbiculatus&mode=sciname Virginia Native Plant Society. 1995. Invasive Alien Plant Species of Virginia: Oriental Bittersweet (Celastrus orbiculatus
Thunb.). Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation. http://www.state.va.us/~dcr/dnh/invcela.htm
autumn olive and Russian olive - page 1 of 3
Autumn olive Elaeagnus umbellata Thunberg
and Russian olive
Elaeagnus angustifolia L. Oleaster Family (Elaeagnaceae)
DESCRIPTION Autumn olive and Russian olive are deciduous, somewhat thorny shrubs or small trees, with smooth gray bark. Their most distinctive characteristic is the silvery scales that cover the young stems, leaves, flowers, and fruit. The two species are very similar in appearance; both are invasive, however autumn olive is more common in Pennsylvania. Height - These plants are large, twiggy, multi-stemmed shrubs that may grow to a height of 20 feet. They occasionally occur in a single-stemmed, more tree-like form.
Leaves - Leaves are alternate, oval to lanceolate, with a smooth margin; they are 2–4 inches long and ¾–1½ inches wide. The leaves of autumn olive are dull green above and covered with silvery-white scales beneath. Russian olive leaves are grayish-green above and silvery-scaly beneath. Like many other non-native, invasive plants, these shrubs leaf out very early in the spring, before most native species. Flowers - The small, fragrant, light-yellow flowers are borne along the twigs after the leaves have appeared in May. Fruit - The juicy, round, edible fruits are about
–½ inch in diameter; those of Autumn olive are deep red to pink. Russian olive fruits are yellow or orange. Both are dotted with silvery scales and produced in great quantity August–October. The fruits are a rich source of lycopene. Birds and other wildlife eat them and distribute the seeds widely.
Russian olive in flower
autumn olive in fruit
autumn olive and Russian olive - page 2 of 3
Roots - The roots of Russian olive and autumn olive contain nitrogen-fixing symbionts, which enhance their ability to colonize dry, infertile soils. DISTRIBUTION AND HABITAT Autumn olive was introduced to the United States from East Asia in the1830s. It was extensively planted in Pennsylvania and other states for revegetation of severely disturbed areas such as strip mines. The Pennsylvania Game Commission has also planted it for wildlife food and cover. Russian olive, native to Eurasia, was planted as an ornamental and for wildlife value. Both species have naturalized extensively in Pennsylvania, and in states from Maine south to Virginia, and west to Wisconsin. Russian olive is also a problem further west. EFFECTS OF INVASION Both autumn olive and Russian olive are very troublesome invasive species; their nitrogen-fixing root nodules allow them to thrive in poor soils. Typical habitats are disturbed areas, roadsides, pastures, and successional fields in a wide range of soils. They are drought tolerant and often invade grasslands and sparse woodlands. Neither species does well in densely forested areas, but Russian olive can be found in moist soils, and does particularly well in sandy floodplains. Both species create heavy shade that suppresses shorter plants requiring direct sunlight. REPRODUCTION AND METHODS OF DISPERSAL Autumn olive and Russian olive spread by seeds disseminated throughout the landscape by birds and other wildlife that consume the fruits. These shrubs grow rapidly, begin to produce fruit as early as 3 years of age, and have the ability to thrive in poor soil. They also resprout vigorously after cutting or burning. CONTROL Mechanical - Seedlings and sprouts can be pulled by hand when the soil is moist enough to insure removal of the root system. On larger plants, cutting alone results in thicker, denser growth upon resprouting. Burning during the dormant season also results in vigorous production of new shoots. Chemical - Glyphosate can be used to control larger plants. Foliar application has proven effective in controlling these species. Since glyphosate is nonselective and will affect all green vegetation, care should be taken to avoid impacting native plants. At sites where this is a concern, application of the herbicide to the freshly cut stumps of the invasive shrubs should achieve the desired results. This method minimizes damage to other plants. Biological - No biological control options are currently known. LANDSCAPE ALTERNATIVES The following native plants are suggested as alternatives to autumn olive or Russian olive in revegetation and wildlife habitat plantings: sweet-fern (Comptonia peregrina),
autumn olive and Russian olive - page 3 of 3
bayberry (Myrica pensylvanica), shining sumac (Rhus copallina), fragrant sumac (Rhus aromatica), staghorn sumac (Rhus typhina), black-haw (Viburnum prunifolium), shadbush (Amelanchier arborea, A. laevis), clammy locust (Robinia viscosa), redbud (Cercis canadensis), New Jersey tea (Ceanothus americanus). REFERENCES Fordham, Ingrid M., Beverly A. Clevidence, Eugene R. Wiley, and Richard H. Zimmerman. 2001. Fruit of autumn olive: a rich source of lycopene. HortScience 36(6): 1136-1137. Rhoads, Ann Fowler and Timothy A. Block. 2000. The Plants of Pennsylvania: An Illustrated Manual. University of Pennsylvania Press, Philadelphia, PA. Rhoads, Ann Fowler and William McKinley Klein. 1993. The Vascular Flora of Pennsylvania: Annotated Checklist and Atlas. American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, PA. Internet resources - http://www.upenn.edu/paflora, http://www.invasivespecies.gov, http://tncweeds.ucdavis.edu
Invasive species fact sheet prepared by: Ann F. Rhoads and Timothy A. Block Morris Arboretum of the University of Pennsylvania 100 Northwestern Ave., Philadelphia, PA 19118 April 2002
autumn olive in fruit
20 May 2005 Page 1 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
FACT SHEET: PURPLE LOOSESTRIFE
Purple Loosestrife Lythrum salicaria L. Loosestrife family (Lythraceae) NATIVE RANGE Eurasia; throughout Great Britain, and across central and southern Europe to central Russia, Japan, Manchuria China, southeast Asia and northern India DESCRIPTION Purple loosestrife is an erect perennial herb in the loosestrife family, with a square, woody stem and opposite or whorled leaves. Leaves are lance-shaped, stalkless, and heart-shaped or rounded at the base. Plants are usually covered by a downy pubescence. Loosestrife plants grow from four to ten feet high, depending upon conditions, and produce a showy display of magenta-colored flower spikes throughout much of the summer. Flowers have five to seven petals. Mature plants can have from 30 to 50 stems arising from a single rootstock. ECOLOGICAL THREAT Purple loosestrife adapts readily to natural and disturbed wetlands. As it establishes and expands, it outcompetes and replaces native grasses, sedges, and other flowering plants that provide a higher quality source of nutrition for wildlife. The highly invasive nature of purple loosestrife allows it to form dense, homogeneous stands that restrict native wetland plant species, including some federally endangered orchids, and reduce habitat for waterfowl.
DISTRIBUTION IN THE UNITED STATES According to the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, purple loosestrife now occurs in every state except Florida. HABITAT IN THE UNITED STATES Purple loosestrife is capable of invading many wetland types, including freshwater wet meadows, tidal and non-tidal marshes, river and stream banks, pond edges, reservoirs, and ditches. BACKGROUND Purple loosestrife was introduced to the northeastern U.S. and Canada in the 1800s, for ornamental and medicinal uses. It is still widely sold as an
ornamental, except in states such as Minnesota, Wisconsin, and Illinois where regulations now prohibit its sale, purchase and distribution. BIOLOGY & SPREAD Purple loosestrife enjoys an extended flowering season, generally from June to September, which allows it to produce vast quantities of seed. The flowers require pollination by insects, for which it supplies an abundant source of nectar. A mature plant may have as many as thirty flowering stems capable of producing an estimated two to three million, minute seeds per year. Purple loosestrife also readily reproduces vegetatively through underground stems at a rate of about one foot per year. Many new stems may emerge vegetatively from a single rootstock of the previous year. "Guaranteed sterile" cultivars of purple loosestrife are actually highly fertile and able to cross freely with purple loosestrife and with other native Lythrum species. Therefore, outside of its native range, purple loosestrife of any form should be avoided.
20 May 2005 Page 2 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
MANAGEMENT OPTIONS Small infestations of young purple loosestrife plants may be pulled by hand, preferably before seed set. For older plants, spot treating with a glyphosate type herbicide (e.g., Rodeo® for wetlands, Roundup® for uplands) is recommended. These herbicides may be most effective when applied late in the season when plant are preparing for dormancy. However, it may be best to do a mid-summer and a late season treatment, to reduce the amount of seed produced. Biological While herbicides and hand removal may be useful for controlling individual plants or small populations, biological control is seen as the most likely candidate for effective long term control of large infestations of purple loosestrife. As of 1997, three insect species from Europe have been approved by the U.S. Department of Agriculture for use as biological control agents. These plant-eating insects include a root-mining weevil (Hylobius transversovittatus), and two leaf-feeding beetles (Galerucella calmariensis and Galerucella pusilla). Two flower-feeding beetles (Nanophyes) that feed on various parts of purple loosestrife plants are still under investigation. Galerucella and Hylobius have been released experimentally in natural areas in 16 northern states, from Oregon to New York. Although these beetles have been observed occasionally feeding on native plant species, their potential impact to non-target species is considered to be low.
USE PESTICIDES WISELY: Always read the entire pesticide label carefully, follow all mixing and application instructions and wear all recommended personal protective gear and clothing. Contact your state department of agriculture for any additional pesticide use requirements, restrictions or recommendations. NOTICE: mention of pesticide products on this page does not constitute endorsement of any material.
CONTACTS For more information on the management of purple loosestrife, please contact:
• Cornell University Non-indigenous Plant Species Program, http://www.invasiveplants.net
• Virginia Natural Heritage Program. http://www.dcr.virginia.gov/dnh/invinfo.htm SUGGESTED ALTERNATIVE PLANTS Native species of Liatris (blazing star) have showy pink-purple flower spikes and are an important nectar source for many native species of butterflies and other insects. OTHER LINKS
• http://www.invasive.org/search/action.cfm?q=Lythrum%20salicaria
• http://nbii-nin.ciesin.columbia.edu/ipane/icat/browse.do?specieId=72 AUTHOR Jil M. Swearingen, National Park Service, Washington, DC PHOTOGRAPHS Barry A. Rice, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA John M. Randall, The Nature Conservancy, Davis, CA REFERENCES Heidorn, R. and B. Anderson. 1991. Vegetation management guideline: purple loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria L.). Natural
Areas Journal 11:172-173. LaFleur, A. 1996. Invasive plant information sheet: purple loosestrife. The Nature Conservancy, Connecticut Chapter. Malecki, R.A. (et al.). 1993. Biological control of purple loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria). BioScience 43 (10):680-686. The Nature Conservancy. Purple Loosestrife: Element Stewardship Abstract. In: Wildland Weeds Management &
Research Program, Weeds on the Web.
20 May 2005 Page 3 of 3
Plant Conservation Alliance®s Alien Plant Working Group Xeeds Hone Xild: Alien Plant Invaders of Natural Areas
http://www.nps.gov/plants/alien/
Thompson, Daniel Q., Ronald L. Stuckey, Edith B. Thompson. 1987. Spread, Impact, and Control of Purple Loosestrife
(Lythrum salicaria) in North American Wetlands. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 55 pages. Virginia Department of Conservation and Natural Resources. 1995. Invasive Alien Plant Species of Virginia: Purple
Loosestrife (Lythrum salicaria).
top related